User Tools

Site Tools


implementation:wms:functionalinformation

Table of Contents

Functional guide

1. Picklist

Please see the Stock allocation algorithm section for information about the rules of creating pick lists.

1.1. Global information

Once a wave is selected on the scanner, all the pick lists in the wave go through a process to allocate the stock to an item detailed level. This means the stock is locked on the location.
Pick list lines that have a location allocated, will get the status ‘ready’.

Stock allocation on detailed level is only done for pick locations.
Stock on a bulk location (Non-pick location) cannot be taken to pick.
Also keep in mind that the stock details from the proposal are copied.

So for example: If on the proposal a certain LUID is locked, the pick list can only take stock for this LUID. This is the same for a batch. The pick list will only allocate for locations where the batch on the proposal is stored.

There are some exceptions to allow the picking on bulk locations: Full pallets can be picked from a bulk location, if this has been configured.

Status:

Not ready ('N'): The pick list has been created, but there is no locking done on detail level.
Partially ready ('A'): Some of the lines still do not have locking on detailed level.
Ready ('R'): All the lines have locking on detailed level.
Partially picked ('I'): Some lines are picked
Picked ('P'): All lines are picked
Partially packed ('T'): Some lines are packed
Packed ('K'): All lines are packed
Partially shipped ('L'): Some lines have been shipped (Pmx sales shipping)
Shipped ('S'): All lines have been shipped (Pmx sales shipping)
Partially delivered ('E'): Some lines have been delivered
Closed ('C'): All lines are closed. Either by closing the pick list or shipping all goods.
Force Close ('F'): This is done when an operator does not count the number of collis correctly

In case a movable location is used to pick on, the lines that are picked will be in status ‘Picked’. The users need to go through the packing flow to pack the items.
When no movable location is used, the picked lines get the status ‘Packed’, because the users will not go through the packing flow.
An exception to this rule is when the option ‘Always status picked?’ is set to true on the Pick list type table (For more explanation see Produmex pick list types (PMX_PLTY))

1.2. Stock order by

Picking, Multi picking, Zone picking

The order to take the stock is based on settings in the pick list controller.

If there is a custom 'Stock order by' option, the sorting will be the value of that setting.

DEFAULT

When the setting has the value *DEFAULT*, the sorting is as below:

Settings that are taken in account:

  • Must the user pick full pallet from bulk location
  • Can the user pick full pallet from bulk location

If the setting ‘Must the user pick full pallet from bulk location’ is checked, the sorting is as follows:

  • BBD
  • BatchNumber
  • BatchNumber2
  • Priority pick location
  • Full pallet
  • Non-pick location
  • Has LUID
  • Location sequence
  • LUID

Otherwise the sorting is done as:

  • BBD
  • BatchNumber
  • BatchNumber2
  • Priority pick location
  • Pick location
  • Has LUID
  • Full pallet
  • Location sequence
  • LUID

After getting this sorting, the system will loop through all the lines it finds. If during this loop, a full pallet is found on a pick location, it is stored in a separate list, and is NOT used on the pick list line. If there is still quantity to allocate after assigning the locations to the pick list line, the stock for full pallets on a pick location is used.

BIGGEST PALLET FIRST

When setting the value as *BIGGEST PALLET FIRST*, the system picks from the pallet where the remaining quantity will be lowest.

First the system sorts the stock as follows:

  • highest quantity
  • oldest LUID

After the sorting, the system will loop through all the lines.

  • If the quantity on the logistic unit is higher than the quantity to pick, the system stores it in a memory list which is sorted by: lowest quantity/ oldest LUID.
  • If the quantity on the logistic unit is lower or equals to the quantity to pick, the system assigns it to the picklist.

When there are still stock to pick after the system looped through every line, it will use stock from the memory list.

Examples
We have the following stock situation for the example:
Product A has 5 pallets in stock, the default quantity per pallet is 10 pcs. But we also have 1 ‘older’ larger pallets that has 12 pcs and also an ‘open’ pallet with only 4 pcs.

Product A SSCC 001 12 pcs
Product A SSCC 002 10 pcs
Product A SSCC 003 10 pcs
Product A SSCC 004 10 pcs
Product A SSCC 005 4 pcs

Scenario 1: Ordered quantity = quantity on given SSCC
Example 1: We have a sales order for 4 pcs → system allocates SSCC 005
Example 2: We have a sales order for 10 pcs → system allocates SSCC 002 (oldest SSCC that matches the quantity)
Example 3: We have a sales order for 12 pcs → system allocates SSCC 001

Scenario 2: Smallest SSCC < Ordered quantity < quantity on given SSCC
Example 1: We have a sales order for 5 pcs → system allocates 4 pcs from SSCC 005 and 1 pcs from SSCC 001 (because this is the oldest).

Scenario 3: Smallest SSCC > Ordered quantity
Example 1: We have a sales order for 3 pcs → system allocates 3 pcs from SSCC 005 (biggest SSCC that is less than the quantity to pick)

Scenario 4: Ordered quantity > Biggest SSCC
Example 1: We have a sales order for 14 pcs → system allocates 12 pcs from SSCC 001 (biggest SSCC that is less than remaining quantity) and allocate 2 pcs from SSCC 005 (smallest remaining quantity)

Scenario 5: Ordered quantity > Biggest SSCC, but lowest quantity does not fulfill the needs
For this scenario the stock is:

Product A SSCC 001 12 pcs
Product A SSCC 002 10 pcs
Product A SSCC 003 10 pcs
Product A SSCC 004 10 pcs
Product A SSCC 005 4 pcs
Product A SSCC 006 1 pcs

Example 1: We have a sales order for 14 pcs → system allocates 12 pcs from SSCC 001 (biggest SSCC that is less than remaining quantity). Next SSCC 006 is used, because the quantity available is more than the remaining quantity.

Now there is still 1 piece remaining. There is no more stock to be used, so now the system will loop through the remaining stock, but smallest quantity first. This means that 1 piece of SSCC 005 will be used.

Ad hoc picking

For ad hoc picking, the stock is sorted by:

  • BBD
  • Batch with smallest free stock
  • Pick locations
  • Location with most LUID’s
  • Non-full pallets
  • Smallest quantities per inventory line
  • Location sequence

'Stock order by' query

The following tables are used in the query:

  • “OITM”
  • “PMX_OSSL”
  • “PMX_OSWA”
  • “PMX_LUID”
  • “PMX_LUID” AS “MasterLUIDTable”
  • “PMX_ITRI”

Subqueries with the used columns:

  • “OldestSerialPerLuid”
    (“LUID”, “SerialNumber”)
  • “InventoryDetail”
    (“InventoryQuantity”, “InventoryQuantityUom2”, “ItemCode”, “QualityStatus”, “PmxWhsCode”, “LocationCode”, “InternalKey”, “LUID”, “MasterLUID”, “ItriKey”)
    This subquery lists all the stock and the details needed for a ‘Detail’ level locking linked to them.
  • “InventoryLUID”
    (“InventoryQuantity”, “InventoryQuantityUom2”, “ItemCode”, “QualityStatus”, “PmxWhsCode”, “LUID”, “MasterLUID”, “ItriKey”)
    This subquery lists all the stock and the details needed for a ‘LUID’ level locking linked to them.
  • “InventoryBatch”
    (“InventoryQuantity”, “InventoryQuantityUom2”, “ItemCode”, “QualityStatus”, “PmxWhsCode”, “ItriKey”)
    This subquery lists all the stock and the details needed for a ‘Batch’ level locking linked to them.
  • “InventoryItem”
    (“InventoryQuantity”, “InventoryQuantityUom2”, „ItemCode“, “QualityStatus”, “PmxWhsCode”)
    This subquery lists all the stock and the details needed for an ‘Item’ level locking linked to them.
  • “LockedItem”
    (“LockedQuantity”, “LockedQuantityUom2”, „ItemCode”, „QualityStatus“, “PmxWhsCode”)
    This subquery lists all the stock locked on ’Item/Quantity’ level with the details needed for the locking.
  • “LockedBatch”
    (“LockedQuantity”, “LockedQuantityUom2”, “ItemCode”, “QualityStatus”, “PmxWhsCode”, “BatchNumber”, “BatchNumber2”, “BBD”, “ItriKey”)
    This subquery lists all the stock locked on ’Batch’ level with the details needed for the locking.
  • “LockedLUID”
    (“LockedQuantity”, “LockedQuantityUom2”, “ItemCode”, “QualityStatus”, “PmxWhsCode”, “LUID”, “BatchNumber”, “BatchNumber2”, “BBD”, “ItriKey”)
    This subquery lists all the stock locked on ’LUID’ level with the details needed for the locking.
  • “LockedDetail”
    (“LockedQuantity”, “LockedQuantityUom2”, “ItemCode”, “QualityStatus”, “PmxWhsCode”, “LocationCode”, “LUID”, “BatchNumber”, “BatchNumber2”, “BBD”, “ItriKey”)
    This subquery lists all the stock locked on ’Detail’ level with the details needed for the locking.

When allocating stock for the picklist, the system will count the available stock based on the following logic:
First the system counts the difference between the inventory quantity and the locked quantity for each level.

{“InventoryItem”.”InventoryQuantity“ - “LockedItem”.”LockedQuantity“}
{“InventoryBatch”.”InventoryQuantity“ - “LockedBatch”.”LockedQuantity“}
{“InventoryLUID”.”InventoryQuantity“ - “LockedLUID”.”LockedQuantity“}
{“InventoryDetail”.”InventoryQuantity“ - “LockedDetail”.”LockedQuantity“}

The lowest calculated value will be taken as the available quantity.

1.3. No location allocated

When there is no location allocated on the pick list, it means that there is no free stock available on the locations allowed for picking.

So there is no free stock on pick locations, and (if configured to allow full pallet bulk picking) there a no free full pallets on bulk locations.

1.4. Pick list screen

1.4.1. Make delivery

On the pick list screen there is a button called ‘Make delivery’.
This button can only be used when:

  • The pick list is in status ‘Ready’
  • The pick list does not have any products with serial numbers
  • The option ‘Do not lock stock on picking’ is not set

When clicking the button, the system will pick, pack, load and deliver the goods on the pick list.
It will use the stock details from the pick list.
It is not possible to override locations, LUID, …

1.4.2. Skip item

This button is available when:

  • The form is in OK mode. This means there are no unsaved changes to the pick list.
  • All selected pick list lines have status ‘Not ready’ or ‘Ready’
  • At least 1 line is selected

When clicking the button, the system will skip the selected lines. This means the lines will be closed, and the items will not be picked.

1.4.3. Choose alternate item

This button is available when:

  • The form is in OK mode. This means there are no unsaved changes to the pick list.
  • The selected pick list line has status ‘Not ready’ or ‘Ready’
  • Exactly 1 line is selected

When clicking the button, the system will show an additional screen where the user can select 1 or more alternate items to pick from.
If over picking is allowed, the system will allow the user to select more than what was needed to pick.
The list of alternate items is compiled the same way as it would on the picking flow.

1.4.4. Adjust quantity for non-inventory items

The quantity for non-inventory items can be changed when the pick list line is in status ‘Ready’.

2. Picklist proposal

Please see the Stock allocation algorithm section for information about the rules of creating pick list proposals.

2.1. Disallowed locations

Stock on some locations is not allowed to use for creation of pick list proposals.
This includes:

  • Can be lined up locations linked to a production line
  • Input location of a production line
  • The production line
  • Special locations linked to a warehouse
  • Moveable locations
  • Locked locations (Cycle count)
  • All locations linked to a WA location

There is a view that is used to get those locations: PMX_DISALLOWED_LOCATIONS_FOR_PICKING

This view used a table with cached data: PMX_CDLP
This table contains the following data:

  • Can be lined up locations linked to a production line
  • Input location of a production line
  • The production line
  • Special locations linked to a warehouse
  • Moveable locations
  • All locations linked to a WA location

The query that is used:

 SELECT "PMX_OSEL"."Code" FROM "PMX_OSEL" WHERE "PMX_OSEL"."TypeCode" IN (N'PRODLINE', N'MOVLOC')
 UNION  SELECT "PMX_OSPL"."InputLocationCode" FROM "PMX_OSPL" WHERE "PMX_OSPL"."InputLocationCode" IS NOT NULL
 UNION  SELECT "PMX_OSPL"."PickToLocationCode" FROM "PMX_OSPL" WHERE "PMX_OSPL"."PickToLocationCode" IS NOT NULL
 UNION  SELECT "PMX_CBLU"."CanBeLinedUpLocationCode" FROM "PMX_CBLU"
 UNION  SELECT "PMX_OSWH"."StorLocLogCar" FROM "PMX_OSWH" WHERE "PMX_OSWH"."StorLocLogCar" IS NOT NULL
 UNION  SELECT "PMX_OSWH"."StorLocRetItem" FROM "PMX_OSWH" WHERE "PMX_OSWH"."StorLocRetItem" IS NOT NULL
 UNION  SELECT "PMX_OSWH"."StorLocLostAndFound" FROM "PMX_OSWH" WHERE "PMX_OSWH"."StorLocLostAndFound" IS NOT NULL
 UNION  SELECT "PMX_OSWA"."InputLocationCode" FROM "PMX_OSWA" WHERE "PMX_OSWA"."InputLocationCode" IS NOT NULL
 UNION  SELECT "PMX_OSWA"."InputWithBoxLocationCode" FROM "PMX_OSWA" WHERE "PMX_OSWA"."InputWithBoxLocationCode" IS NOT NULL
 UNION  SELECT "PMX_OSWA"."OutputLocationCode" FROM "PMX_OSWA" WHERE "PMX_OSWA"."OutputLocationCode" IS NOT NULL
 UNION  SELECT "PMX_OSSL"."Code" FROM "PMX_OSSL" WHERE "PMX_OSSL"."BlockStockFromBeingUsedOnProposal" = N'Y'

The cached table is filled when the add-on or fat client is started.

The locked locations are retrieved when running the view, because this information can change a lot.

2.2. Shelf life calculation

In order to calculate the shelf life of an item for a particular customer & shipping address, the systems evaluates the shelf lives that can be found at different places. The first matching shelf life will be taken into account, according to the following priority:

  • shelf life defined in the sales order line (RDR1.U_PMX_SHLF column)
    • Note: Produmex WMS does not support negative shelf life values.
  • shelf life defined on the item master data for the customer code and country code
  • shelf life defined on the item master data for the customer code
  • shelf life defined on the item master data for the country code
  • shelf life defined for the customer code and country code (@PMX_CSSL user table)
  • shelf life defined for the customer code (@PMX_CSSL user table)
  • shelf life defined for the country code (@PMX_CSSL user table)
  • shelf life defined on the item master data (OITM.U_PMX_SLID field)

3. Catch weight

With the catch weight function, it is possible to keep track of the stock in two UoM’s. The catch weight settings of an item can be set on the Produmex Catch Weight tab of the Item Master Data. We recommend the following setup for catch weight items:

  • Set the inventory UoM to the lowest sellable unit, eg. pieces, cases in order to avoid rounding issues.
  • Set the number of decimals of the inventory UoM to zero.
  • Set the weight as the second UoM.

Example: The stock is stored in a case that contains six pieces. If the company only sells cases, the inventory UoM can be ‘piece’ or ‘case’ for this item. But if the company sells pieces as well, the inventory UoM should be pieces. When the UoM would be case, it means that one piece would be 0,16666 cases. This would cause rounding issues during picking/delivering etc.

Please note: Serial managed catch weight items are not supported.

Supported functionality:

  • Purchase Receipt
  • Purchase Return
  • Ad hoc moves
  • Picking
  • Multi picking
  • Ad hoc picking customer collect
  • Packing
  • Shipping
  • Cycle count
  • Production flow
  • Production receipt flow
  • Cross docking
  • Put away
  • Sales return
  • Quality status changes
  • Zone picking
  • Ad hoc picking
  • Mobile packing
  • Consolidated packing
  • Easy Stock selector
  • Direct cycle count
  • Picking for production
  • Production manager
  • Replenishment

5. 3PL invoicing

5.1. Configurations for the 3PL invoicing

Before starting the 3PL invoicing flow, go through the following steps:

5.1.1. Create business partners

Because a 3PL partner can be a customer and a vendor at the same time, in order to handle 3PL partners, create multiple business partner master records for one 3PL partner.

  • Customer: Create a customer master record for sales deliveries.
  • Vendor: Create a vendor master record for goods receipt PO’s.
  • Invoicing customer: Create a customer master record for 3PL invoices.

For the 3PL invoicing process, link the customer(s) to the vendor and the vendor(s) to the invoicing customer.

Linked Business Partner

The vendor has to be entered into the Linked Business Partner field under the Produmex tab in the ‘Business Partners Master Data’ window of the customer.

Similarly, the invoicing customer has to be entered into the Linked Business Partner field of the vendor.

The linking mechanism allows to link multiple customers to the same vendor and multiple vendors to the same invoicing customer.

5.1.2. Set an owner to the item

To define the ownership of an item, use the ‘Preferred vendor’ field under the ‘Purchasing Data’ tab in the ‘Item Master Data’ window. Because in this field only vendor type business partners can be selected, add the Vendor partner.

It is not possible to set more than one owner to an item. That is why you must add a new item for each owner even though it is the same item.

5.1.3. Set the 3PL price(s) to the item

Open the ’Item Master Data’ window. Under the ’Produmex’ tab, go to the 3PL tab. At this tab the item’s 3PL prices can be defined.

The 3PL inbound price will be used when the price calculation is based on the inbound item quantity.
The 3PL outbound price will be used when the price calculation is based on the outbound item quantity.

For further information about the 3PL prices see: 3.1.3. Produmex 3PL Tab

5.1.4. Set the 3PL extension parameters

Set the 3PL extension parameters at the 3PL controller.
For further information about the settings in the 3PL invoicing controller see: 5.1.3.1. 3PL invoicing controller

5.1.5. Create 3PL item(s)

Create 3PL invoicing item(s) for the 3PL service. The 3PL invoicing items cannot be inventory items. The 3PL invoice will be created based on these item(s) and will only contain 3PL invoicing items.

5.1.6. Define a 3PL item to the 3PL price calculation

Open the ‘Organizational Structure’ window from the Produmex module. At the company level, go to the ‘3PL Invoicing‘ tab. Select a 3PL price calculation type, and choose a 3PL item to assign to it from the list. Only non-inventory items will be displayed in the 3PL item list. After assigning a 3PL item, check the ‘Is active?’ box.
For further information about 3PL price calculation types see: 5.1.11. 3PL invoicing

Additional settings for the ‘Storage bin location usage per location type’ price calculation:

5.1.7. Create location types

Add location types at the Produmex Location Types window.
For further information about the location types see: 3.2.3.28. Location types (PMX_LOTY)

5.1.8. Set the location type

Set the location type for the bins where items are stored during the 3PL process. Location types are used when the price calculation is based on the storage bin location usage.

5.2. 3PL invoicing process

When activating the “3PL Invoicing” menu, the “3PL invoicing selection criteria” form opens. There, you can select an invoicing period type and an invoicing period according to the selected period type.
Invoicing period types:

  • Weekly: from the dropdown menu, select the year and the week. By default the previous week will be displayed.
  • Monthly: from the dropdown menu, select the year and the month. By default the previous month will be displayed.
  • Ad-hoc: define the period by entering dates the “date from” and the “date to” fields.

Note: It is possible to select a period which not ended yet, but a warning window will pop up after clicking on the ‘Generate Invoices’ button.

Then you can load 3PL invoicing customers that still need to be invoiced for the selected period. These are the customers who meet both of the following conditions:

  • are the linked partner of another business partner
  • have no A/R invoice or draft document with the “3PL Period” user-defined field set to the first date of the selected period

Select a 3PL invoicing partner from the list. When none of the partners is selected, the system will generate an invoice for each partner on the list. Different generation types can be selected:

  • Add mode: the invoice can be modified manually before being added
  • Draft: the invoice can be saved as a draft
  • Create: the invoice will be created immediately

The 3PL invoices consist of a certain amount of prices, in separate lines, all calculated differently. The created 3PL invoice is linked to the invoicing period by the ’3PL Period’ UDF. This UDF contains the starting date of the invoicing period. Business partners who already have an invoice for the same starting invoicing date will not be listed in the 3PL invoicing selection criteria window.

5.2.1. Inbound document count

The quantity is the number of goods receipt PO’s with the Doc Date included in the invoicing period.
The unit price is the invoicing item’s price, for the price list of the invoicing customer.

5.2.2. Inbound line count

The quantity is the total number of goods receipt PO lines belonging to goods receipt PO’s with the Doc Date included in the invoicing period.
The unit price is the invoicing item’s price, for the price list of the invoicing customer.

5.2.3. Inbound item quantity

For each goods receipt PO line, a price is calculated that is equal to the item’s 3PL inbound price (which can be set up on the Produmex tab of the item master data) multiplied by the received quantity (in inventory UoM). The inbound item quantity price is the total of all these prices for ¬all goods receipt PO’s in the invoicing period.
On the 3PL invoice, the quantity for that item is always 1, and the total price is set as unit price.

5.2.4. Outbound document count

The quantity is the number of sales deliveries with the Doc Date included in the invoicing period.
The unit price is the invoicing item’s price, for the price list of the invoicing customer.

5.2.5. Outbound line count

The quantity is the total number of delivery lines belonging to sales deliveries with the Doc Date included in the invoicing period.
The unit price is the invoicing item’s price, for the price list of the invoicing customer.

5.2.6. Outbound item quantity

For each sales delivery line, a price is calculated that is equal to the item’s 3PL outbound price (which can be set up on the Produmex tab of the item master data) multiplied by the delivered quantity (in inventory UoM). The outbound item quantity price is the total of all these prices for ¬all sales deliveries in the invoicing period.
On the 3PL invoice, the quantity for that item is always 1, and the total price is set as unit price.

5.2.7. Storage bin location usage per location type

For each location type for which active 3PL settings have been defined, the algorithm calculates the bin location usage of each supplier’s stocks on this location type, day per day. The stock level of every day is calculated from the current inventory and the inventory history.
For each day, the algorithm calculates the list of locations that should be invoiced for storage of the supplier’s items:

  • If ‘Daily used number of locations’ is active, then all bin locations that have contained any item of the supplier will be added to the list
  • If ‘Daily final stock’ is active, then all bin locations that contain any item of the supplier will be added to the list

The storage price of each bin location is defined in the price list of the item linked to its location type, and the total storage price for the day is the sum of the bin location prices. If a bin location has no location type, then its price is zero.
If the shortest invoiceable duration is ‘Week’ or ‘Month’, then if a location is used on any day of the week/month, it is considered as used during the whole week/month, and its daily storage price is then multiplied by the corresponding number of days.
On the 3PL invoice, one separate line is added for each location type that takes part into the calculation.

7. Barcodes

7.1. Variable GTIN

Variable GTIN barcodes are GTIN barcodes, where a quantity is encoded in the barcode. This quantity can have different purposes, and the part of the barcode that holds the variable value can be different for each prefix.

This possibility in a GTIN barcode depends on the country where this product is used. This means that a certain prefix in a country could have a different meaning in another country.

To be able to handle this difference there is some configuration required to make the variable GTIN barcode scanning work in Produmex.

Variable GTIN configuration (UDT: PMX_VGTC)

Here the configuration of what prefixes are a variable GTIN barcode, and what purpose of the variable value means, is stored.

Item master data

On the item master data the fixed part of the variable GTIN barcode needs to be stored.
And a barcode type the value GTIN-Variable needs to be selected.

Example

Barcode on a label: 02801180070405

As a prefix the fixed part has been configured: 02801180.
The start index is 8, and length is 5.
This means that the following part is the variable part:
02801180070405

The number of decimals is 3, which results in a quantity of: 07.040 = 7.04

The purpose of this value is the 'Net weight in Kg'.

So if the barcode 02801180070405 gets scanned on our client, the following happens:

  • Check if the scanned barcode has a prefix available in the variable GTIN configuration
  • Yes:
    • Remove the variable part and check digit (This is the last digit) of the barcode: 02801180.
      This value will be matched against the item master data.
    • Get the value of the variable part: 7.04
    • Store that value in the field defined in the 'Value purpose' of the configuration: Net weight = 7.04 Kg.
  • No:
    • This will be regarded as a normal GTIN, and the barcode 02801180070405 will be matched against the item master data

8. Location suggestions

8.1 High level explanation

When the location suggestion is enabled, the system will suggest a location for the stock that is being moved in the following flows:

  • Reception (In case of receiving on location instead of dock)
  • Put away
  • Ad hoc moves
  • Move orders
  • Unpicking for production
  • Undo picking
  • Consolidated moves

When a destination location needs to be entered these flows will perform the following scenario:

  1. Check if location suggestions are enabled
  2. Enabled:
    1. Get list of suggested locations
    2. Show first suggested location on the screen
    3. Enter a location or select a location
      1. The list of suggested locations is displayed on the screen after the ‘Select location’ button is pressed
    4. When the location is not the first suggested location or an empty location:
      1. Enter a reason
  3. Not enabled:
    1. Enter a location or select a location
      1. All valid locations are allowed

8.2 Location controller - Handle location suggestions

The location suggestion can be enabled and configured on the location controller. When a location needs to be suggested, the list will only show locations that fit the requirements.

8.2.1 Use location suggestions?

The location suggestion can be disabled for a warehouse. If the destination warehouse has the setting 'UseLocationSuggestions' disabled, no location will be suggested from the warehouse and all valid locations can be selected when the stock is being moved.

8.2.2 Suggest locations

Get empty fixed pick location

A fixed pick location will be suggested first when all the following are verified:

  • If the ‘Allow to suggest an empty fixed pick location’ option is enabled on the Location Controller.
  • If there is only one item to be moved.
  • If there are empty fixed location(s) or empty location(s) which can be replenished.
  • If the batch to move is the oldest batch on a bulk location. (FEFO, Itri)
Get base locations

Next the system identifies the base location(s) for the item(s) to move. Base locations are used only for identifying the put away zones and will not be suggested by the system.

Base location(s) can be the following:

  • locations that are ‘Fixed’ and assigned to the item
  • locations that are ‘Can be replenished’ and assigned to the item
  • location is defined as the Standard location for the item on the Produmex Inventory tab of the Item Master Data. Please note: if a standard zone is defined for the item, it’s not taken into account.

When multiple items are moved, all base locations for the items to move will be retrieved.

Get put away zones

Base locations can be linked to a put away zone, but should not belong to it. (The ‘Location belongs to the Put Away Zone’ option should not be checked). If a location belongs to a put away zone, it will not be considered as a base location.

After the system identifies the base locations, it executes a query to check if there are put away zones linked to the base locations.

When there are put away zone(s) linked to the base location(s), the put away zone(s) are used to identify the locations to be suggested and to define the order of these locations.

To define the order of the locations that can be suggested, the system uses the following logic:

  1. First it sorts the linked put away zones based on the sequence of the put away zone.
  2. Then starting from the first zone, it sorts the locations belonging to the zone. The locations belonging to the zone are sorted based on the pick sequence defined on the ‘General’ tab of the location. If the ‘Sort Pick Sequence Descending’ option is not enabled for the put away zone, the belonging locations are sorted ascending, otherwise the locations are sorted descending.

Example
In the example we move the item ‘Item A’. The item has no default storage location. The destination warehouse has the following locations:

Location Code P1.1.P1.2.A1.1.A1.2.A1.3.A2.1.A2.2.A2.3.
Fixed? (ITEM A)YNNNNNNN
Can be replenished? (ITEM A)NNNNNNNN
Put away zone (linked) Z1, Z2-------
Put away zone (belongs to) --Z1Z1Z1Z2Z2Z2

First the system identifies the base locations. In our example there is one base location:

  • P1.1., because it is fixed for Item A.

Next the system finds the put away zones. In our example there are two put away zones:

  • Z1, because it is linked to P1.1.
  • Z2, because it is linked to P1.1.

Finally the system will get the list of locations that belong to the identified put away zones. In the example the following locations belong to a zone:

Location Code A1.1.A1.2.A1.3.A2.1.A2.2.A2.3.
Put away zone (belongs to) Z1Z1Z2Z2Z2Z2
Pick sequence(belongs to) 123123

Scenario 1
Base location P1.1. has linked put away zones with the following configuration:

Put away zoneZ1Z2
Sort Pick Sequence DescendingNN
Sequence 12

When the system will get storage locations, it will use this order:
A1.1, A1.2, A1.3, A2.1, A2.2, A2.3

Scenario 2
Base location P1.1. has linked put away zones with the following configuration:

Put away zoneZ1Z2
Sort Pick Sequence DescendingNY
Sequence 12

When the system will get storage locations, it will use this order:
A1.1, A1.2, A1.3, A2.3, A2.2, A2.1

Get location suggestions

When there are put away zone(s) linked to the base location(s), only locations that belong to the put away zone(s) can be suggested.

When the base location(s) have no linked put away zones, all locations can be suggested.

When there are no base location(s), all locations can be suggested.

List location suggestions

After the locations that can be suggested are queried, the system filters and sorts the list in order to list location suggestions.

Filtering
  • A location is not allowed if the item cannot be stored on the location based on the zone type.
  • A location is not allowed if the item cannot be stored on the location based on the fixed items of the location.
  • A location is not allowed if the maximum number of logistic units will be exceeded.
  • A location is not allowed if the ‘Block move when location is not empty’ option is enabled for the location and the location is not empty.
  • A location is not allowed if the Item Storage Location type of the location is not the same as the Item Storage Location Type of the item. If there are multiple items to move that have different location types, every location with one of the Item Storage Location Types linked to the item are allowed.
  • Only bulk locations are allowed if the ‘Allow to suggest pick locations during moves/put away’ option is not enabled on the Location Controller
  • A location is not allowed if the ‘Block move when location is not empty’ option is enabled for the location and the location is not empty.
  • If pick locations are allowed, but the ‘Can be put on a pick location’ option is disabled for the quality status of the stock to be moved, then no pick locations can be suggested

Please note: The quality status allowed on the location is not taken into account during the filtering of the locations.

Sorting

After the list of locations is filtered, the system sorts the remaining locations. The found locations will be sorted by the Order by clause defined on the location controller. However there are a few additional rules:

  • When enabled, an empty fixed pick location will be suggested first (See Get fixed pick location section).
  • Next the suggested locations are added
  • In case a flow first builds a list of moves, before adding them to the database, a list of already selected locations is kept in memory. When the suggested location is a location that has already been selected, it will be added to the suggested locations after the 'normal' suggested location. This is to avoid always showing the same location as the first suggested location.
  • If a suggested location is actually the source location to move from, it will be added to the bottom of the list.

When the ’Force to use first suggested location during moves/put away’ option is enabled on the location controller, the user has to select a reason in order to proceed if the scanned/selected location is not the first suggested location or an empty location. Every reason with the flag 'Use for standard flow deviation' can be selected. The selected reason and the first suggested location is stored in the PMX_MVLI table.

9. Packing flows

Because the packing station is a fixed location, most of the packing flows run on a fixed touchscreen terminal. The flows on the touchscreen terminal vary in the inputs used for identifying the items to be packed.

  • Packing flow: the flow uses movable location(s) as input
  • Consolidated packing flow: the flow uses pick list(s) and logistic unit(s) as input.
  • Item packing flow: the flow uses a moveable location as an input, but the pick list can be identified by scanning an item.
  • Cash register packing: the flow uses a pick list as an input. The user can perform the picking and packing in one step.

Produmex also provides a packing flow called Mobile packing flow which runs on a scanner. Because the flow does not need a fixed touchscreen, there are less constraints for the packing process with respect to the available packing stations.

Creating button specific barcodes

During the packing flows running on a fixed touchscreen terminal, different buttons will be enabled for you on the screen. There are six buttons, which you do not necessarily have to press on the screen:

  1. Add SSCC
  2. Enter cart manually
  3. Add items
  4. Finish logistic unit
  5. Select all
  6. Skip items

Instead, you have the option to create barcodes which you can scan. The barcode needs to start with '<BUTTON>' and then you need to add the translation key of the given button.

ButtonExamples for barcodes
1.Add SSCC <BUTTON>MSG_BUTTON_PACKING_ADD_SSCC
2.Enter cart manually <BUTTON>MSG_BUTTON_PACKING_IDENTIFY_CART
3.Add items <BUTTON>MSG_BUTTON_PACKING_ADD_ITEMS
4.Finish logistic unit <BUTTON>MSG_BUTTON_PACKING_FINISH_PALLET
5.Select all <BUTTON>MSG_BUTTON_SELECT_ALL
6.Skip items <BUTTON>MSG_BUTTON_PACKING_SKIP_ITEMS

Example
On the first screen below you have the option to press the button Add items manually. Instead of pressing the button, you can scan your barcode and the system will press the button automatically.

Both actions will navigate you to the next screen where you can proceed with the Finish logistic unit button.

In the next sections you will have several opportunities to use the six buttons. Whenever any of them is mentioned, please keep in mind that you can scan your own button specific barcode instead.

9.1. Packing

Select a packing lineIdentify moveable locationAdd itemsFinish logistic unit

Note: It is possible to set the touchscreen to be only used for the Packing flow: In the Organizational Structure select the MainTouchPackingFlow for the thin client. For more information about the thin client settings see: 5.2.10. Thin client settings.

9.1.1. Select a packing line

Select a packing line where the items that have to be packed are located.

9.1.2. Identify moveable location

After selecting a packing line, scan the moveable location on which the items currently are or tap the Enter cart manually button and enter the code of the moveable location by using the keyboard.

When there are items picked for multiple customers onto that moveable location, the system displays a list of these customers. Select a customer/address and proceed by tapping the right arrow button. When there are items for only one customer on the moveable location, the system automatically proceeds with that customer.

9.1.3. Select a task

When the Allow to create master SSCC option is enabled on the Pick list controller, it is possible to create a master SSCC during the packing. On the Select a task screen tap the Create master SSCC button to pack onto a master SSCC. Tap the Create normal SSCC button to pick onto a normal SSCC.

When the Use pallet packing type from customer master data option is enabled on the on the Packing controller and the Pallet packing type is Multiple Pallet, Pallet –multiple carton or Ask user, add the number of identical logistic units as well.

In the case of working with master SSCCs, first add the number of the identical master SSCCs and then add the number of identical sub SSCCs on a single master SSCC.

9.1.4. Adjust quantity and select items

On the next screen the system displays the list of the items picked into the movable location. You can use the input field to filter the list.

Select items

Displayed information:
At the top left corner the system shows the name of the customer and the shipping address.

At the top right corner the system displays the picklist number(s), the SSCC number and the pick and pack remarks.

Note: When packing on multiple SSCCs, the system displays the text Multiple SSCCs.

Additional information displayed on the screen: barcode, item code, item description, batch number, best before date and total quantity.

The total quantity marks the open quantity on the moveable location.

  • When packing on multiple SSCCs, the total quantity marks the total quantity on the moveable location / the number of identical SSCCs.
  • When packing on multiple identical master and sub SSCC, the total quantity marks the total quantity on the moveable location / (the number of identical master SSCCs * number of identical sub SSCCs)

Grouped items
By default, the system groups the items that have the same identical item number, batch1 number and best before date. You can ungroup and then regroup the items by clicking the button button.
If the grouped lines have items managed by serial numbers, the system asks you to scan the serial numbers by picklist lines as a next step in the flow.

Items ungrouped

Adjust quantity

By default, the system displays the total quantity in the Quantity to pack section. The maximum quantity that can be packed is the total quantity on the line.

Adjust the quantity by tapping + or - in the Quantity to pack section. The quantity can also be entered by using a keyboard. Click on the quantity field and enter the quantity on the keyboard. Press Enter to close the keyboard.

Adjust quantity on keyboard

Select items

Select the items to be packed by clicking on the line or use the Select all button to select all the items on the list.

Select items

9.1.5. Add items

If at least one item is selected, the Add items button becomes active. Tap the button and the selected items are moved onto the logistic unit.

The items that have already been packed are not displayed on the list. Packed items cannot be removed from the logistic unit.

When at least one item is packed onto the logistic unit, the system creates a LUID for it. After the LUID is generated, it is displayed on the screen.

Add items

Logistic carrier

If you have logistic carriers enabled, the system asks which one you want to use. If the Ask logistic unit when LUID is finished setting is enabled on the packing controller, the Packing Flow does not ask for the logistic carrier when a new LUID is started, but only when you indicate that the logistic unit is full.

Scanning an external SSCC
If the Allow the input of an external SSCC? and Force user to rescan SSCC settings are enabled on the Packing Controller, the system displays the Scan an SSCC screen when the first item is added and allows for scanning an external SSCC instead of generating a new SSCC automatically.

After scanning an SSCC, each time you add a new item to the logistic unit, you must rescan the SSCC to ensure that the item is added to the appropriate logistic unit. If the wrong SSCC is scanned, the system displays an error message and does not allow the item to be added to the logistic unit. You must scan the appropriate SSCC (or select a different item and then scan the appropriate SSCC) to proceed with the flow.

Scan an SSCC

9.1.6. Add cart

New items for the same customer can be added to the list of possible items to pack. For adding items from another moveable location, scan the barcode or tap the Enter cart manually button and enter the code.

9.1.7. Finish logistic unit

If there is at least one item packed into the logistic unit, the Finish logistic unit button becomes active.

Finish logistic unit

Tap the Finish logistic unit button and the system prints the SSCC label. (Packing: finished logistic unit event (500) print event) After finishing a logistic unit, the system displays the shipping dock where to logistic unit has to be moved.

When creating a master SSCC during the picking and tapping the Finish logistic unit button, the system asks whether you wish to finish the master SSCC or the sub SSCC.

Tap the Master SSCC is full button to finish the master SSCC. After finishing the master logistic unit, the system prints the labels for the master and the sub logistic units and displays the dock where the master logistic unit has to be moved. On the next screen declare whether you would like to start a master or a sub SSCC.

Tap the Sub SSCC is full button to finish the sub SSCC. The picking will be continued onto a new sub SSCC, but onto the same master SSCC.

If every item is packed and ‘Automatic shipping’ is enabled for the shipping type of the base document, the Master SSCC is not finished screen is opened. Tap the Yes button to finish the master SSCC as well.

On the next screen the select a logistic unit to pack on or tap the Start new logistic unit button to create a new logistic unit.

9.1.7.1. Capture weight

If the ‘Ask weight?’ or ‘Ask weight Sub SSCC?’ option is set to true on the Produmex pick list types user table for the pick list, and there is a scale defined under the shipping dock/packing line, the weight of the logistic unit can be measured on the connected scale after the logistic unit is finished.

Make sure that conversions between the units of measurements are set up correctly on the Units of Measure - Setup (OUOM) and Weight - Setup (OWGT) SBO standard tables.

  1. The measured weight. The UoM is the UoM defined for the scale. The number of decimals displayed depends on the scale accuracy.
    This field is automatically filled with the weight measured on the connected scale. It is possible to manually overwrite the measured weight.
    If the weight is manually added or the connection to the scale is lost, the value starts flickering in red.
  2. If the scale has a defined zero command, the ‘Zero’ button is displayed.
  3. If the scale has a defined tare command, the ‘Tare’ button is displayed.
  4. The code of the connected scale.
  5. If there are more than one scales defined under the dock/packing line, an additional Switch scale button is displayed on the screen. Tap this button to change the scale.
    On the next screen select the scale from the list. Every scale defined under the dock/packing line is listed. After switching the scale, the screen will use the chosen scale. After proceeding with the flow, and a new weight needs to be captured, the standard logic to choose a scale is used. This means that switching scale only switches the scale for the current weighing.
  6. SSCC number of the logistic unit.
  7. Theoretical weight: The theoretical weight is the sum of the weight of the items on the logistic unit. The item weight can be defined on the Sales tab of the Item Master Data.
  8. In the case of master SSCC’s, an additional Sub SSCC’s weight value is shown. The value is calculated as the sum of the measured weight of the Sub SSCC’s.
9.1.7.2. Enter dimensions

If the Ask weight?/ Ask weight Sub SSCC? option is enabled for the pick list type, and there is no scale defined under the shipping dock/packing line, the user has to enter the weight of the (sub) logistic unit after it is finished. The data will be stored on the PMX_LUID table. The unit of measure is the Default Weight UoM set on the Display tab of General Settings.

Based on the pick list type settings, the user might have to enter the dimension(s) of the (sub) logistic unit after it is finished.

When there are package dimensions defined on the Package Dimensions table, the user can select a predefined dimension instead of entering the length, the width and the height manually. The ’Select a package’ screen opens. On this screen every package dimension that is not cancelled is listed. Select a dimension from the list or tap the Enter dimensions manually button.

When the Enter dimensions manually button is tapped or there are no package dimensions defined, the user has to enter the dimensions manually.

  • If the Ask length?/ Ask length Sub SSCC? option is enabled for the pick list type, the user has to enter the length of the (sub) logistic unit after the it is finished.
  • If the Ask width?/ Ask width Sub SSCC? option is enabled for the pick list type, the user has to enter the width of the (sub) logistic unit after the it is finished.
  • If the Ask height?/ Ask height Sub SSCC? option is enabled for the pick list type, the user has to enter the height of the (sub) logistic unit after the it is finished.

The data will be stored on the PMX_LUID table. The unit of measure is the Default Length UoM set on the Display tab of General Settings.

9.1.8. Skip items

It is possible that there are goods that cannot be packed. Continue the packing until only products that cannot be packed are listed on the screen.
Tap the Skip all items button to skip every remaining item.

On the next screen confirm that you would like to skip the remaining items.

Confirm skipping

The system proceeds to the Select a reason screen.
Select a reason from the list. Every reason that can be used for picking is listed.

Select a reason

On the next screen define where the skipped items should be moved.

  • To move the items onto an SSCC, scan the SSCC. If the scanned SSCC is not in stock, identify the destination location as described below.
  • To create a new SSCC, tap the New SSCC button then identify the destination location as described below. If configured, the 700 - WHS: created LU print event is triggered and the logistic label is printed.
  • Scan the destination location or select it from a list.
    • Tap the Select location button to list every active location from the warehouse.
    • Tap the Select empty location button to list every empty active location from the warehouse.

Please note: If no SSCC is created or selected, the items will be moved without a linked logistic unit.

Select destination

After the destination location is defined, the system removes the locking from the skipped products and updates the pick list.

  • If the total quantity on the pick list line is skipped, the system adds the selected reason to the pick list line and closes it.
  • If the pick list line is partially skipped, the ‘Open’ and ‘Picked’ quantity of the pick list line is updated with the packed quantity. A closed line will be added with the quantity and the details of the skipped product and the selected reason.

After the lockings are removed, the skipped products are moved onto the selected logistic unit or destination location. Then the system returns to the Select moveable location screen where the user can continue the packing.

9.1.9. Restarting the flow

The flow can be continued after it has been stopped. Restart the flow and select the packing location. If there are a moveable location, scan the moveable location as well. Then the system will offer the option to choose from the existing logistic units or to start a new one.

After selecting the logistic unit, scan the SSCC barcode on the logistic unit.

9.1.10. Continue the packing onto an already packed logistic unit

When there are already packed logistic unit(s) for the selected customer or shipping address, the system will offer the option to choose from the existing logistic unit(s) or to start a new one. After selecting a logistic unit, scan the SSCC barcode on it.

9.2. Consolidated packing

9.2.1. Consolidated packing flow (creating SSCC number)

This flow takes place when logistic units were used instead of movable locations during the picking. The flow uses the logistic unit(s) as an input and an SSCC number is created.
Before starting the picking flow, set the following configurations:

Consolidated packing flow

Select a packing lineSelect a picklist#select_a_picklistScan an SSCCPack and add itemsAdd SSCCFinish SSCC
9.2.1.1. Select a packing line

Select a packing line where the items that have to be packed are located.

9.2.1.2. Select a picklist

After selecting a packing location, the system will display the list of the pick lists which have been picked to the zone linked to the packing location.

Select a pick list from the list and proceed by tapping the right arrow.

9.2.1.3. Scan an SSCC

Scan the SSCC barcode on the logistic unit. (Logistic units cannot be selected from the list.)

9.2.1.4. Select a task

If the Allow to create master SSCC option is enabled on the Pick list controller, it is possible to create a master SSCC during the packing. On the Select a task screen tap the ‘Create master SSCC’ button to pack onto a master SSCC. Tap the Create normal SSCC button to pick onto a normal SSCC.

When the ‘Use pallet packing type from customer master data’ option is enabled on the on the Packing controller and the Pallet packing type is ‘Multiple Pallet’, ‘Pallet –multiple carton’ or ‘Ask user’, add the number of identical logistic units as well.

In the case of working with master SSCC’s, first add the number of the identical master SSCC’s, then add the number of identical sub SSCC’s on a single master SSCC.

9.2.1.5. Adjust quantity and select items

On the next screen the system displays the list of the items picked into the movable location. You can use the input field to filter the list.

Select items

Displayed information:
At the top left corner the system shows the name of the customer and the shipping address.

At the top right corner the system displays the picklist number(s) and the pick and pack remarks.

Additional information displayed on the screen: barcode, item code, item description, batch number, best before date and total quantity.

The total quantity marks the open quantity on the moveable location.

  • When packing on multiple SSCCs, the total quantity marks the total quantity on the moveable location / the number of identical SSCCs.
  • When packing on multiple identical master and sub SSCC, the total quantity marks the total quantity on the moveable location / (the number of identical master SSCCs * number of identical sub SSCCs)

Grouped items
By default, the system groups the items that have the same identical item number, batch1 number and best before date. You can ungroup and then regroup the items by clicking the button button.
If the grouped lines have items managed by serial numbers, the system asks you to scan the serial numbers by picklist lines as a next step in the flow.

Group and ungroup items

Adjust quantity

By default, the system displays the total quantity in the Quantity to pack section. The maximum quantity that can be packed is the total quantity on the line.

Adjust the quantity by tapping + or - in the Quantity to pack section. The quantity can also be entered by using a keyboard. Click on the quantity field and enter the quantity on the keyboard. Press Enter to close the keyboard.

Adjust quantity on keyboard

Select items

Select the items to be packed by clicking on the line or use the Select all button to select all the items on the list.

Select all items

9.2.1.6. Add items

If at least one item is selected, the Add items button becomes active. Tap the button and the selected items are moved onto the logistic unit.

The items that have already been packed are not displayed on the list. Packed items cannot be removed from the logistic unit.

When at least one item is packed onto the logistic unit, the system creates a LUID for it. After the LUID is generated, it is displayed on the screen.

Add items

9.2.1.7. Add SSCC

New items for the same customer can be added to the list of possible items to pack. For adding items from another moveable location, scan the barcode or tap the Add SSCC button and enter the code.

9.2.1.8. Finish SSCC

If there is at least one item packed into the logistic unit, the ‘Finish logistic unit’ button will be active. After tapping the Finish logistic unit button, the system prints the SSCC label. (Packing: finished logistic unit event (500) print event) After finishing a logistic unit, the system displays the shipping dock where to logistic unit has to be moved.

When creating a master SSCC during the picking, after the Finish logistic unit button has been tapped, the system asks whether to finish the master SSCC or the sub SSCC.

Tap the Master SSCC is full button to finish the master SSCC. After finishing the master logistic unit, the system prints the labels for the master and the sub logistic units and displays the dock where the master logistic unit has to be moved. On the next screen declare whether you would like to start a master or a sub SSCC.

Tap the Sub SSCC is full button to finish the sub SSCC. The picking will be continued onto a new sub SSCC, but onto the same master SSCC.

If every item is packed and Automatic shipping is enabled for the shipping type of the base document, the Master SSCC is not finished screen is opened. Tap the Yes button to finish the master SSCC as well.

On the next screen the select a logistic unit to pack on or tap the Start new logistic unit button to create a new logistic unit.

9.2.1.8. Finish SSCC / Capture weight

If the Ask weight? or Ask weight Sub SSCC? option is set to true on the Produmex pick list types user table for the picklist, and there is a scale defined under the shipping dock/packing line, the weight of the logistic unit can be measured on the connected scale after the logistic unit is finished.

Make sure that conversions between the units of measurements are set up correctly on the Units of Measure - Setup (OUOM) and Weight - Setup (OWGT) SBO standard tables.

  1. The measured weight. The UoM is the UoM defined for the scale. The number of decimals displayed depends on the scale accuracy.
    This field is automatically filled with the weight measured on the connected scale. It is possible to manually overwrite the measured weight.
    If the weight is manually added or the connection to the scale is lost, the value starts flickering in red.
  2. If the scale has a defined zero command, the Zero button is displayed.
  3. If the scale has a defined tare command, the Tare button is displayed.
  4. The code of the connected scale.
  5. If there are more than one scales defined under the dock/packing line, an additional Switch scale button is displayed on the screen. Tap this button to change the scale.
    On the next screen select the scale from the list. Every scale defined under the dock/packing line is listed. After switching the scale, the screen will use the chosen scale. After proceeding with the flow, and a new weight needs to be captured, the standard logic to choose a scale is used. This means that switching scale only switches the scale for the current weighing.
  6. SSCC number of the logistic unit.
  7. Theoretical weight: The theoretical weight is the sum of the weight of the items on the logistic unit. The item weight can be defined on the Sales tab of the Item Master Data.
  8. In the case of master SSCC’s, an additional Sub SSCC’s weight value is shown. The value is calculated as the sum of the measured weight of the Sub SSCC’s.
9.2.1.8. Finish SSCC / Enter dimensions

If the Ask weight?/ Ask weight Sub SSCC? option is enabled for the pick list type, and there is no scale defined under the shipping dock/packing line, the user has to enter the weight of the (sub) logistic unit after it is finished. The data will be stored on the PMX_LUID table. The unit of measure is the Default Weight UoM set on the Display tab of General Settings.

Based on the pick list type settings, the user might have to enter the dimension(s) of the (sub) logistic unit after it is finished.

When there are package dimensions defined on the Package Dimensions table, the user can select a predefined dimension instead of entering the length, the width and the height manually. The ’Select a package’ screen opens. On this screen every package dimension that is not cancelled is listed. Select a dimension from the list or tap the Enter dimensions manually button.

When the Enter dimensions manually button is tapped or there are no package dimensions defined, the user has to enter the dimensions manually.

  • If the Ask length?/ Ask length Sub SSCC? option is enabled for the pick list type, the user has to enter the length of the (sub) logistic unit after the it is finished.
  • If the Ask width?/ Ask width Sub SSCC? option is enabled for the pick list type, the user has to enter the width of the (sub) logistic unit after the it is finished.
  • If the Ask height?/ Ask height Sub SSCC? option is enabled for the pick list type, the user has to enter the height of the (sub) logistic unit after the it is finished.

The data will be stored on the PMX_LUID table. The unit of measure is the Default Length UoM set on the Display tab of General Settings.

9.2.1.9. Skip items

It is possible that there are goods that cannot be packed. Continue the packing until only products that cannot be packed are listed on the screen.
Tap the Skip all items button to skip every remaining item.

On the next screen confirm that you would like to skip the remaining items.

Confirm skipping

The system proceeds to the Select a reason screen.
Select a reason from the list. Every reason that can be used for picking is listed.

Select a reason

On the next screen define where the skipped items should be moved.

  • To move the items onto an SSCC, scan the SSCC. If the scanned SSCC is not in stock, identify the destination location as described below.
  • To create a new SSCC, tap the New SSCC button then identify the destination location as described below. If configured, the 700 - WHS: created LU print event is triggered and the logistic label is printed.
  • Scan the destination location or select it from a list.
    • Tap the Select location button to list every active location from the warehouse.
    • Tap the Select empty location button to list every empty active location from the warehouse.

Please note: If no SSCC is created or selected, the items will be moved without a linked logistic unit.

Select destination

After the destination location is defined, the system removes the locking from the skipped products and updates the pick list.

  • If the total quantity on the pick list line is skipped, the system adds the selected reason to the pick list line and closes it.
  • If the pick list line is partially skipped, the ‘Open’ and ‘Picked’ quantity of the pick list line is updated with the packed quantity. A closed line will be added with the quantity and the details of the skipped product and the selected reason.

After the lockings are removed, the skipped products are moved onto the selected logistic unit or destination location. Then the system returns to the Select moveable location screen where the user can continue the packing.

9.2.1.10. Restarting the flow

The flow can be continued after it has been stopped. Restart the flow and select the packing location. If there are a moveable location, scan the moveable location as well. Then the system will offer the option to choose from the existing logistic units or to start a new one.

After selecting the logistic unit, scan the SSCC barcode on the logistic unit.

9.2.1.11. Continue the packing onto an already packed logistic unit

When there are already packed logistic unit(s) for the selected customer or shipping address, the system will offer the option to choose from the existing logistic unit(s) or to start a new one. After selecting a logistic unit, scan the SSCC barcode on it.

9.2.2. Consolidated packing flow (keeping SSCC number)

This flow can be used to double check the content of the carton boxes/logistic units prepared during the Prepare carts and Multi-picking flows. The flow keeps the SSCC number added to the carton boxes during the Prepare carts flow and it will only fully confirm or reject the content.

Before starting the picking flow, set the following configurations:

Bild1551973500769

Prepare cartsMulti-pickingSelect a packing locationSelect a picklistScan an SSCCAdd itemsLogistic unit is finished.Shipping flow
9.2.2.1. Select a packing location

Select a packing line where the logistic units to be checked are located.

Select a packing location

9.2.2.2. Select a picklist

After selecting a packing location, the system will display the list of the picklists which have been picked to the zone linked to the packing location.

Select a picklist from the list and proceed by pressing the right arrow.

Select a picklist

9.2.2.3. Scan an SSCC

Scan the SSCC barcode of the logistic unit.
Even if multiple SSCC's are available to be scanned, only one SSCC can be scanned at a time.

Please note that logistic units cannot be selected from the list.

Scan an SSCC

9.2.2.4. Add items

On the next screen you can see that the flow keeps the SSCC number and displays it on the upper right corner of the screen. Click Add items.

Please note that in this scenario all items need to be packed at the same time. It is not possible to partially pack because the goods are stored in the same SSCC. All the goods that are on the SSCC will be displayed and automatically selected. It is not possible to adjust the quantity or de-select a line.

9.2.2.5. Logistic unit is finished

After tapping the Add items button, the system automatically performs the Finish logistic unit functionality. The packed SSCC is ready for shipping and moved to the destination location defined in the picklist.

9.2.2.6. Skip all items

In this process it is not possible to partially pack, therefore the goods in the box are either complete and can be packed, or there is something wrong (for example items missing, there are more items than necessary in the box, etc.), in which case all items need to be skipped.

Tap the Skip all items button and on the next screen confirm that you wish to skip all the items.

The system proceeds to the Select a reason screen.
Select a reason from the list. Every reason that can be used for picking is listed.

Select a reason

On the next screen define where the skipped items should be moved.

  • To move the items onto an SSCC, scan the SSCC. If the scanned SSCC is not in stock, identify the destination location as described below.
  • To create a new SSCC, press the New SSCC button then identify the destination location as described below. If configured, the 700 - WHS: created LU print event is triggered and the logistic label is printed.
  • Scan the destination location or select it from a list.
    • Press the Select location button to list every active location from the warehouse.
    • Press the Select empty location button to list every empty active location from the warehouse.

Please note: If no SSCC is created or selected, the items will be moved without a linked logistic unit.

Select destination

After the destination location is defined, the system removes the locking from the skipped products and updates the picklist. The system adds the selected reason to the pick list line and closes it.

After the locking is removed, the skipped products are moved onto the selected logistic unit or destination location. Then the system returns to the Select a picklist screen where the user can continue the packing.

9.3. Item packing

9.3.1. Select a packing line

Select a packing line where the items that have to be packed are located.

9.3.2. Identify moveable location

After selecting a packing location, scan the moveable location on which the items currently are or tap the Enter cart manually button and enter the code of the moveable location.

9.3.3. Select task

If the Allow to create master SSCC option is enabled on the Pick list controller, it is possible to create a master SSCC during the packing. On the Select a task screen tap the Create master SSCC button to pack onto a master SSCC. Tap the Create normal SSCC button to pick onto a normal SSCC.

If the Use pallet packing type from customer master data option is enabled on the on the Packing controller and the Pallet packing type is Multiple Pallet, Pallet –multiple carton or Ask user, add the number of identical logistic units as well.

When working with master SSCCs, first add the number of the identical master SSCCs and then add the number of identical sub SSCCs on a single master SSCC.

9.3.4. Scan items

The next screen shows the list of items that have been picked onto the moveable location.

By default, the item quantity is 0 because the flow allows to define the quantity by scanning. The item quantity cannot exceed the total quantity. Only items on the list can be scanned, otherwise an error message is displayed.

Scan items

Grouped items
By default, the system groups the items that have the same identical item number, batch1 number and best before date. You can ungroup and then regroup the items by clicking the button button.
If the grouped lines have items managed by serial numbers, the system asks you to scan the serial numbers by picklist lines as a next step in the flow.

Items ungrouped

Scan item barcodes
Start scanning the item barcodes. After scanning the first item, the system automatically selects a customer and the address based on which customer ordered the least amount of the scanned item. The system shows the name of the customer, the shipping address and the picklist number(s).

After scanning the first item, only those items are displayed on the list that have been picked for the customer. The system selects scanned items.

Note: When using only the touchscreen, select an item by tapping on the line. After selecting the first item, the system automatically identifies the customer. After the first selection, only those items are displayed that have been picked for the customer.

9.3.5. Adjust quantity and select items

On the next screen the system displays the list of the items picked into the movable location. You can use the input field to filter the list.

Grouped items
By default, the system groups the items that have the same identical item number, batch1 number and best before date. You can ungroup and then regroup the items by clicking the button button.
If the grouped lines have items managed by serial numbers, the system asks you to scan the serial numbers by picklist lines as a next step in the flow.

Select items

Displayed information:
At the top left corner the system shows the name of the customer and the shipping address.

At the top right corner the system displays the picklist number(s), the SSCC number and the pick and pack remarks.

Note: When packing on multiple SSCCs, the system displays the text Multiple SSCCs.

Additional information displayed on the screen: barcode, item code, item description, batch number, best before date and total quantity.

The total quantity marks the open quantity on the moveable location.

  • When packing on multiple SSCCs, the total quantity marks the total quantity on the moveable location / the number of identical SSCCs.
  • When packing on multiple identical master and sub SSCC, the total quantity marks the total quantity on the moveable location / (the number of identical master SSCCs * number of identical sub SSCCs)

Adjust quantity

By default, the system displays the total quantity in the Quantity to pack section. The maximum quantity that can be packed is the total quantity on the line.

Adjust the quantity by tapping + or - in the Quantity to pack section. The quantity can also be entered by using a keyboard. Click on the quantity field and enter the quantity on the keyboard. Press Enter to close the keyboard.

Adjust quantity on keyboard

Select items

Select the items to be packed by clicking on the line or use the Select all button to select all the items on the list.

Select items

9.3.6. Add items

If at least one item is selected, the Add items button becomes active. Tap the button and the selected items are moved onto the logistic unit.

The items that have already been packed are not displayed on the list. Packed items cannot be removed from the logistic unit.

When at least one item is packed onto the logistic unit, the system creates a LUID for it. After the LUID is generated, it is displayed on the screen.

Add items

Scanning an external SSCC
If the Allow the input of an external SSCC? and Force user to rescan SSCC settings are enabled on the Packing Controller, the system displays the Scan an SSCC screen when the first item is added and allows for scanning an external SSCC instead of generating a new SSCC automatically.

After scanning an SSCC, each time you add a new item to the logistic unit, you must rescan the SSCC to ensure that the item is added to the appropriate logistic unit. If the wrong SSCC is scanned, the system displays an error message and does not allow the item to be added to the logistic unit. You must scan the appropriate SSCC (or select a different item and then scan the appropriate SSCC) to proceed with the flow.

Scan an SSCC

9.3.7. Add cart

New items for the same customer can be added to the list of possible items to pack. For adding items from another moveable location, scan the barcode or tap the Enter cart manually button and enter the code.

9.3.8. Finish logistic unit

If there is at least one item packed into the logistic unit, the Finish logistic unit button becomes active.

Finish logistic unit

Tap the Finish logistic unit button and the system prints the SSCC label (Packing: finished logistic unit event (500) print event).

After finishing a logistic unit, the system displays the shipping dock where to logistic unit has to be moved.

When creating a master SSCC during the picking, after the Finish logistic unit button has been tapped, the system asks whether you want to finish the master SSCC or the sub SSCC.

Tap the Master SSCC is full button to finish the master SSCC. After finishing the master logistic unit, the system prints the labels for the master and the sub logistic units and displays the dock where the master logistic unit has to be moved. On the next screen declare whether you would like to start a master or a sub SSCC.

Tap the Sub SSCC is full button to finish the sub SSCC. The picking is continued onto a new sub SSCC, but onto the same master SSCC.

If every item is packed and Automatic shipping is enabled for the shipping type of the base document, the Master SSCC is not finished screen is opened. Tap the Yes button to finish the master SSCC as well.

On the next screen the select a logistic unit to pack on or tap the Start new logistic unit button to create a new logistic unit.

9.1.8.1. Capture weight

If the ‘Ask weight?’ or ‘Ask weight Sub SSCC?’ option is set to true on the Produmex pick list types user table for the pick list, and there is a scale defined under the shipping dock/packing line, the weight of the logistic unit can be measured on the connected scale after the logistic unit is finished.

Make sure that conversions between the units of measurements are set up correctly on the Units of Measure - Setup (OUOM) and Weight - Setup (OWGT) SBO standard tables.

  1. The measured weight. The UoM is the UoM defined for the scale. The number of decimals displayed depends on the scale accuracy.
    This field is automatically filled with the weight measured on the connected scale. It is possible to manually overwrite the measured weight.
    If the weight is manually added or the connection to the scale is lost, the value starts flickering in red.
  2. If the scale has a defined zero command, the Zero button is displayed.
  3. If the scale has a defined tare command, the Tare button is displayed.
  4. The code of the connected scale.
  5. If there are more than one scales defined under the dock/packing line, an additional Switch scale button is displayed on the screen. Tap this button to change the scale.
    On the next screen select the scale from the list. Every scale defined under the dock/packing line is listed. After switching the scale, the screen will use the chosen scale. After proceeding with the flow, and a new weight needs to be captured, the standard logic to choose a scale is used. This means that switching scale only switches the scale for the current weighing.
  6. SSCC number of the logistic unit.
  7. Theoretical weight: The theoretical weight is the sum of the weight of the items on the logistic unit. The item weight can be defined on the Sales tab of the Item Master Data.
  8. In the case of master SSCC’s, an additional Sub SSCC’s weight value is shown. The value is calculated as the sum of the measured weight of the Sub SSCC’s.
9.1.8.2. Enter dimensions

If the Ask weight?/ Ask weight Sub SSCC? option is enabled for the pick list type, and there is no scale defined under the shipping dock/packing line, the user has to enter the weight of the (sub) logistic unit after it is finished. The data will be stored on the PMX_LUID table. The unit of measure is the Default Weight UoM set on the Display tab of General Settings.

Based on the pick list type settings, the user might have to enter the dimension(s) of the (sub) logistic unit after it is finished.

When there are package dimensions defined on the Package Dimensions table, the user can select a predefined dimension instead of entering the length, the width and the height manually. The ’Select a package’ screen opens. On this screen every package dimension that is not cancelled is listed. Select a dimension from the list or tap the Enter dimensions manually button.

When the Enter dimensions manually button is tapped or there are no package dimensions defined, the user has to enter the dimensions manually.

  • If the Ask length?/ Ask length Sub SSCC? option is enabled for the pick list type, the user has to enter the length of the (sub) logistic unit after the it is finished.
  • If the Ask width?/ Ask width Sub SSCC? option is enabled for the pick list type, the user has to enter the width of the (sub) logistic unit after the it is finished.
  • If the Ask height?/ Ask height Sub SSCC? option is enabled for the pick list type, the user has to enter the height of the (sub) logistic unit after the it is finished.

The data will be stored on the PMX_LUID table. The unit of measure is the Default Length UoM set on the Display tab of General Settings.

9.3.9. Skip items

It is possible that there are goods that cannot be packed. Continue the packing until only products that cannot be packed are listed on the screen.
Tap the Skip all items button to skip every remaining item.

On the next screen confirm that you would like to skip the remaining items.

Confirm skipping

The system proceeds to the Select a reason screen.
Select a reason from the list. Every reason that can be used for picking is listed.

Select a reason

On the next screen define where the skipped items should be moved.

  • To move the items onto an SSCC, scan the SSCC. If the scanned SSCC is not in stock, identify the destination location as described below.
  • To create a new SSCC, tap the New SSCC button then identify the destination location as described below. If configured, the 700 - WHS: created LU print event is triggered and the logistic label is printed.
  • Scan the destination location or select it from a list.
    • Tap the Select location button to list every active location from the warehouse.
    • Tap the Select empty location button to list every empty active location from the warehouse.

Please note: If no SSCC is created or selected, the items will be moved without a linked logistic unit.

Select destination

After the destination location is defined, the system removes the locking from the skipped products and updates the pick list.

  • If the total quantity on the pick list line is skipped, the system adds the selected reason to the pick list line and closes it.
  • If the pick list line is partially skipped, the ‘Open’ and ‘Picked’ quantity of the pick list line is updated with the packed quantity. A closed line will be added with the quantity and the details of the skipped product and the selected reason.

After the lockings are removed, the skipped products are moved onto the selected logistic unit or destination location. Then the system returns to the Select moveable location screen where the user can continue the packing.

9.3.10. Restarting the flow

The flow can be continued after it has been stopped. Restart the flow and select the packing location. If there are a moveable location, scan the moveable location as well. Then the system will offer the option to choose from the existing logistic units or to start a new one.

After selecting the logistic unit, scan the SSCC barcode on the logistic unit.

9.3.11. Continue the packing onto an already packed logistic unit

When there are already packed logistic unit(s) for the selected customer or shipping address, the system will offer the option to choose from the existing logistic unit(s) or to start a new one. After selecting a logistic unit, scan the SSCC barcode on it.

9.4. Mobile packing

This flow is available in the scanner mode. In the mobile packing flow the system do not display the maximum quantity to pack. The flow is used for a second verification whether the picked quantities are correct.

Select a packing lineIdentify moveable locationPack itemAdd chartFinish SSCC

To initiate the flow, press on the ‘Mobile packing’ function from the ‘Sales’ menu.

9.4.1. Select a packing line

Select a packing line where the items that have to be packed are located.

9.4.2. Identify moveable location

Scan the moveable location on which the items currently are or press the ‘Select moveable location’ button and select it from the list.

After identifying the moveable location, select a customer/ address from the list.

9.4.3. Pack item

Then identify items by scanning or selecting from a list (press the ‘Select a product’ button.) Add the quantity with the + / - buttons. There is no limit to the entered quantity, but the system will display an error message if the entered quantity exceeds the picked quantity still available on the moveable location. Press the right arrow to proceed. After the first item is packed onto the logistic unit, the system creates a LUID for it.

9.4.4. Add chart

It is possible to add items from another moveable location, if the items were picked for the selected customer. Select the ‘Other moveable location’ button.

9.4.5. Finish SSCC

If there are at least one item packed onto the logistic unit, the ‘Finish logistic unit’ button will be available. When pressing this button, the packing onto the logistic unit is finished. The system prints the SSCC label (Packing: finished logistic unit event (500) print event) and displays the shipping dock where to logistic unit has to be moved.

When there are still picked items on the moveable location, the packing can be continued onto another logistic unit.

After packing all the picked items for the customer from the moveable location, the system will ask whether to finish the SSCC or proceed with the packing from another moveable location.

9.4.5.1. Capture weight

If the ‘Ask weight?’ or ‘Ask weight Sub SSCC?’ option is set to true on the Produmex pick list types user table for the pick list, and there is a scale defined under the shipping dock/packing line, the weight of the logistic unit can be measured on the connected scale after the logistic unit is finished.

Make sure that conversions between the units of measurements are set up correctly on the Units of Measure - Setup (OUOM) and Weight - Setup (OWGT) SBO standard tables.

  1. The measured weight. The UoM is the UoM defined for the scale. The number of decimals displayed depends on the scale accuracy.
    This field is automatically filled with the weight measured on the connected scale. It is possible to manually overwrite the measured weight.
    If the weight is manually added or the connection to the scale is lost, the value starts flickering in red.
  2. If the scale has a defined zero command, the ‘Zero’ button is displayed.
  3. If the scale has a defined tare command, the ‘Tare’ button is displayed.
  4. The code of the connected scale.
  5. If there are more than one scales defined under the dock/packing line, an additional Switch scale button is displayed on the screen. Tap this button to change the scale.
    On the next screen select the scale from the list. Every scale defined under the dock/packing line is listed. After switching the scale, the screen will use the chosen scale. After proceeding with the flow, and a new weight needs to be captured, the standard logic to choose a scale is used. This means that switching scale only switches the scale for the current weighing.
  6. SSCC number of the logistic unit.
  7. Theoretical weight: The theoretical weight is the sum of the weight of the items on the logistic unit. The item weight can be defined on the Sales tab of the Item Master Data.
  8. In the case of master SSCC’s, an additional Sub SSCC’s weight value is shown. The value is calculated as the sum of the measured weight of the Sub SSCC’s.
9.4.5.2. Enter dimensions

If the Ask weight?/ Ask weight Sub SSCC? option is enabled for the pick list type, and there is no scale defined under the shipping dock/packing line, the user has to enter the weight of the (sub) logistic unit after it is finished. The data will be stored on the PMX_LUID table. The unit of measure is the Default Weight UoM set on the Display tab of General Settings.

Based on the pick list type settings, the user might have to enter the dimension(s) of the (sub) logistic unit after it is finished.

When there are package dimensions defined on the Package Dimensions table, the user can select a predefined dimension instead of entering the length, the width and the height manually. The ’Select a package’ screen opens. On this screen every package dimension that is not cancelled is listed. Select a dimension from the list or tap the Enter dimensions manually button.

When the Enter dimensions manually button is tapped or there are no package dimensions defined, the user has to enter the dimensions manually.

  • If the Ask length?/ Ask length Sub SSCC? option is enabled for the pick list type, the user has to enter the length of the (sub) logistic unit after the it is finished.
  • If the Ask width?/ Ask width Sub SSCC? option is enabled for the pick list type, the user has to enter the width of the (sub) logistic unit after the it is finished.
  • If the Ask height?/ Ask height Sub SSCC? option is enabled for the pick list type, the user has to enter the height of the (sub) logistic unit after the it is finished.

The data will be stored on the PMX_LUID table. The unit of measure is the Default Length UoM set on the Display tab of General Settings.

9.4.6. Restarting the flow

The flow can be continued after it has been stopped. Restart the flow and select the packing location. If there are a moveable location, scan the moveable location as well. Then the system will offer the option to choose from the existing logistic units or to start a new one.

After selecting the logistic unit, scan the SSCC barcode on the logistic unit.

9.4.7. Continue the packing onto an already packed logistic unit

When there are already packed logistic unit(s) for the selected customer or shipping address, the system will offer the option to choose from the existing logistic unit(s) or to start a new one. After selecting a logistic unit, scan the SSCC barcode on it.

9.5. Cash register packing

The Cash register packing flow uses a pick list as an input. In this flow users can perform picking and packing in one step, therefore the input pick list does not have to be picked.

Select packing lineSelect pick listScan barcodeadd_itemsfinish_logistic_unit

9.5.1. Select a packing location

Select a packing line from the list. Every active packing line from the warehouses assigned to the thin client are listed.

If there are already started logistic units on the packing line, the ‘Select a logistic unit to pack on’ screen is displayed. On this screen every packed logistic unit, which is not yet shipped, is listed. The customer name and address is displayed for each logistic unit. To continue packing onto a logistic unit, select the logistic unit and press the right key button. To start a new logistic unit, press the ‘Start new logistic unit’ button.

9.5.2. Select pick list

On the next screen select a pick list. Every pick list that meets the following conditions is displayed:

  • The ‘Use for Cash register packing?’ option enabled for the pick list type.
  • The status is ‘Not Ready’, ‘Partially Ready’, ‘Ready’, ‘Partially Picked’, ‘Picked’ or ‘Partially Packed’.
  • The pick list is assigned to the warehouse of the selected packing line.

9.5.3. Scan barcode

On the next screen the items to pack are listed.

  • Product: The barcode, item code and description of the item to pack.
  • Batch number, Best before date: The batch number, the second batch number and the best before date of the allocated stock. The stock to be packed is allocated from pick locations based on the stock details available on the pick list and based on the FEFO rule. Only stock details that are available on the sales order are enforced.
  • Total: The open quantity on the pick list. Items with no open quantity are not listed.
  • Quantity to pack: The quantity to pack. If the ‘Force user to only scan items?’ option is enabled on the Packing controller, then the quantity to pack can only be added by scanning the barcode, otherwise the quantity can be adjusted with the + - buttons.

The following barcodes can be scanned on this screen:

  • EAN number of the item.
  • GS1 128 barcode. It is possible to pack stock with different details than the allocated stock, except if the stock detail was set on the sales order.
  • Batch number. If the batch number belongs to multiple items, select the item to pack on the opening screen. (Batch with multiple BBD on stock?)
  • Serial number. If the serial number belongs to multiple items, select the item to pack on the opening screen.
  • SSCC number. In the case of a mixed pallet, select the item to pack on the opening screen.

Each scanned barcode increases the quantity by one if valid stock can be found. Over picking is not allowed.

9.5.4. Add items

If there is at least one item where the ‘Quantity to pack’ is not zero, the ‘Add items’ button becomes active. Press this button to pack the ‘Quantity to pack’ amount of the selected items.

If there is a stated logistic unit for the pick list, the system adds the packed items to that logistic unit.
If there is no stated logistic unit for the pick list, then the system checks whether there are started logistic units for the customer. If there are, then the user can continue the packing onto one of those logistic units or create a new one. If there are no started logistic units for the customer, the system automatically creates a new one.
The started logistic unit is displayed on the top right corner of the screen.

If the item to add is managed by serial numbers and not all serial number were scanned, then the serial numbers has to be scanned before packing the item. On the next screen indicate whether you would like to scan the serial numbers one by one or you would like to scan the starting and ending serial number only. For more information about adding the quantity by scanning the serial numbers please see: Screens for entering additional information

9.5.5. Finish logistic unit

If there is at least one product packed onto the logistic unit, the ‘Finish logistic unit’ button becomes active. Press this button to finish the logistic unit.
If configured, the Packing: finished logistic unit event (500) print event is triggered and the SSCC label is printed. After finishing a logistic unit, the system displays the shipping dock where the logistic unit has to be moved.

9.5.5.1. Capture weight

If the ‘Ask weight?’ or ‘Ask weight Sub SSCC?’ option is set to true on the Produmex pick list types user table for the pick list, and there is a scale defined under the shipping dock/packing line, the weight of the logistic unit can be measured on the connected scale after the logistic unit is finished.

Make sure that conversions between the units of measurements are set up correctly on the Units of Measure - Setup (OUOM) and Weight - Setup (OWGT) SBO standard tables.

  1. The measured weight. The UoM is the UoM defined for the scale. The number of decimals displayed depends on the scale accuracy.
    This field is automatically filled with the weight measured on the connected scale. It is possible to manually overwrite the measured weight.
    If the weight is manually added or the connection to the scale is lost, the value starts flickering in red.
  2. If the scale has a defined zero command, the ‘Zero’ button is displayed.
  3. If the scale has a defined tare command, the ‘Tare’ button is displayed.
  4. The code of the connected scale.
  5. If there are more than one scales defined under the dock/packing line, an additional Switch scale button is displayed on the screen. Tap this button to change the scale.
    On the next screen select the scale from the list. Every scale defined under the dock/packing line is listed. After switching the scale, the screen will use the chosen scale. After proceeding with the flow, and a new weight needs to be captured, the standard logic to choose a scale is used. This means that switching scale only switches the scale for the current weighing.
  6. SSCC number of the logistic unit.
  7. Theoretical weight: The theoretical weight is the sum of the weight of the items on the logistic unit. The item weight can be defined on the Sales tab of the Item Master Data.
  8. In the case of master SSCC’s, an additional Sub SSCC’s weight value is shown. The value is calculated as the sum of the measured weight of the Sub SSCC’s.

9.5.6. Skip items

It is possible that there are goods that cannot be packed. Continue the packing until only products that cannot be packed are listed on the screen.
Tap the Skip all items button to skip every remaining item.

On the next screen confirm that you would like to skip the remaining items.

Confirm skipping

The system proceeds to the Select a reason screen.
Select a reason from the list. Every reason that can be used for picking is listed.

Select a reason

On the next screen define where the skipped items should be moved.

  • To move the items onto an SSCC, scan the SSCC. If the scanned SSCC is not in stock, identify the destination location as described below.
  • To create a new SSCC, tap the New SSCC button then identify the destination location as described below. If configured, the 700 - WHS: created LU print event is triggered and the logistic label is printed.
  • Scan the destination location or select it from a list.
    • Tap the Select location button to list every active location from the warehouse.
    • Tap the Select empty location button to list every empty active location from the warehouse.

Please note: If no SSCC is created or selected, the items will be moved without a linked logistic unit.

Select destination

After the destination location is defined, the system removes the locking from the skipped products and updates the pick list.

  • If the total quantity on the pick list line is skipped, the system adds the selected reason to the pick list line and closes it.
  • If the pick list line is partially skipped, the ‘Open’ and ‘Picked’ quantity of the pick list line is updated with the packed quantity. A closed line will be added with the quantity and the details of the skipped product and the selected reason.

After the lockings are removed, the skipped products are moved onto the selected logistic unit or destination location. Then the system returns to the Select moveable location screen where the user can continue the packing.

10. Cycle Count

To check the correctness of the stock that is kept at the administrative level against the stock that is actually present in the warehouse, Produmex offers a cycle counting function. Produmex provides two types of cycle count:

  • ‘Direct cycle count’: This type of count automatically books stock differences as “Goods Issues” (in case of negative differences) or “Goods Receipts” (in case of positive differences) in SAP.
  • ‘Cycle count’: This type of count will not directly book the differences into SAP. First it registers the differences in Produmex according to the type of cycle count (Lost and Found, Registration). Then the booking in SAP can be done in the ‘Processing’ step.

‘Cycle count’ types:

  • Lost and Found: The differences will be booked during the count therefore the new stock will be displayed in the inventory without processing. To balance the inventory, the system will add the inverse of the stock difference to the ‘Lost and Found’ location.
  • Registration: The differences will be stored in a table and the stock on the counted location will remain the same until the count is processed.

Please note that differences for serial numbers will always use type 'Registration', regardless of the selected type in the controller.

10.1. Configurations

Before starting the cycle count, adjust the following settings:

10.1.1. Quality status

The quality status of the found stock can be the following:

  1. The default quality status of the location.
    • If the location has a default quality status set.
  2. The quality status of the stock that has the exact same details (Location, SSCC, Batch, BBD).
    • If the counted location has no default quality status set and there is only one quality status found for the stock with the same details.
  3. The default quality status set for cycle counting on the Defaults tab of the Organizational Structure.
    • If the counted location has no default quality status set and multiple quality status found for the stock with the same details or there is no stock with the same details.

When quantity is reduced and there are two or more statuses found for the same stock details, the system will also replace them with the default “Quality status cycle counting”. Additional items that are counted at a certain location where existing stock row is found, will also get the default “Quality status cycle counting”.

Examples:
Default quality status: BLOCKED

Scenario 1:
Location default quality status: -
On location: 1 piece with quality status RELEASED
Counting: 2 pieces
Result: The additional piece will get quality status RELEASED

Scenario 2:
Location default quality status: -
On location: 1 piece with quality status RELEASED and 1 piece with quality status REJECTED
Counting: 3 pieces
Result: All 3 pieces will get quality status BLOCKED

Scenario 3:
Location default quality status: -
On location: 2 piece with quality status RELEASED and 2 piece with quality status REJECTED
Counting: 3 pieces
Result: All 3 pieces will get quality status BLOCKED

Scenario 4:
Location default quality status: -
On location: 0 pieces
Counting: 2 pieces
Result: The 2 pieces will get quality status BLOCKED

Scenario 5:
Location default quality status: SUQ
On location: 0 pieces
Counting: 3 pieces
Result: The 3 pieces will get quality status SUQ

10.1.2. Cycle Count Controller

Adjust cycle count settings for the company. For further information about the cycle count controller see:
5.1.3.9. Cycle count controller

10.1.3. Location

Adjust cycle count settings for a location. For further information about the cycle count settings see:
5.2.6.2 Cycle count

10.1.4. Lost and Found

When using the cycle count type ‘LostAndFound’, extra configuration needs to be done:
Create a non pick BIN location where the stock differences will be booked. On the warehouse definition select this location as Location ‘Lost and Found’ from a dropdown menu.

10.1.5. Cycle count during other operations

Set the configurations for the cycle count during other operations. For further information see:
3.2.3.17. Produmex cycle count – Other operations filter (PMX_COOF)

10.1.6. Pick List Controller

Set if the system allows cycle count on alternate picking. For further information see:
5.1.3.44. Picklist controller

10.1.7. Force serial numbers during cycle count

When the ‘Force serial numbers during cycle count’ option is enabled for items with PMX serial numbers and enabled track location, then during the ‘Cycle count’ process, the quantity must be entered by scanning the serial numbers. This option can be enabled at the item’s Produmex Inventory tab.

10.2. Direct Cycle Count

Count locationIdentify locationScan SSCCIdentify productEnter batch dataAdd quantityAdjust logistic unitScan SSCCSelect itemAdjust quantityCount items on locationIdentify locationIdentify productScan SSCCEnter batch dataAdd quantity

Select the “Direct cycle counting” function on the handheld terminal.

Select the cycle count task:

  • Count location: count all the items on this location.
  • Adjust logistic unit: count all the items on the selected logistic unit.
  • Count items on location: count only a certain product on the location.

10.2.1. Count location

Identify location

Identify the location for which cycle counting has to be done.

Scan SSCC

Identify the logistic unit on which the item is stored or to select “No SSCC” in case the item is not stored on an existing logistic unit.

Stop process

To stop the process, press the ‘Stop’ button. After pressing the button, the system will ask for confirmation.

  • Press ‘No’ to proceed with the cycle count.
  • Press ‘Yes’ to finish the cycle count. After pressing ‘Yes’, the differences will be shown if configured. If no item was counted during the cycle count, the location will be booked as an empty location.
Identify product

Scan or select an item. It is possible to scan the GTIN on the product or the GS1/EAN128 barcode on the logistic unit (in case of a mono pallet). When selecting a product manually, the complete item list will open, as it is always possible that any item which has not been registered administratively at that location, may be present there.

Enter batch data

If there is no GS1/EAN128 product barcode on the logistic unit, the system will ask to enter additional information about the product manually, e.g. the batch number, second batch number, and/or the best before date. If there is a GS1/EAN128 barcode on the logistic unit, the system would have recorded this information directly.

Add quantity

Enter the quantity.

Add new item or finish process

After the confirmation of the quantity, the system asks whether to count an additional item at that location. When pressing ‘Yes’, the counting process will proceed with a new item. When pressing ‘No’, the system calculates if there is a difference between the quantity of items counted on the location and the registered quantity in the inventory report.

When there is no difference, the system will display an empty ‘Difference stock’ screen.

When there is a difference, the following will be shown on the screen:

  • In the case the difference is positive, the handheld will show a blue arrow pointing upward. (Items with differing batch data will be counted as a new item as well.)
  • In the case the counted item is new for this location, the handheld will show a green arrow pointing upwards to the right.
  • In the case the difference is negative (i.e. less stock at the location than registered in inventory), the handheld will show a red arrow pointing downwards to the right and add a minus sign before the quantity.

Press the right arrow button to confirm the differences. After that, the system books positive differences as “Goods Receipt” and negative differences as “Goods Issue”. The pricelist defined on the Cycle count controller is used on these documents.

Cancel cycle count

To cancel the process, press the left arrow button. The system will check whether there are already entered stock. If there are, the system will ask for confirmation.

  • When clicking ‘Yes’, the list of counted stock will be cleared, and no bookings will be done. This can be considered a ‘cancellation’ of the counted stock.
  • When clicking ‘No’ the cycle count process can be continued.

10.2.2. Adjust logistic unit

Scan SSCC

Identify the SSCC. After identifying the SSCC, the system will display all the items stored on the SSCC.

Select item

Select an item from the list.

Adjust quantity

Adjust the quantity of the selected item. If the quantity in stock matches with the quantity in the inventory, the system goes back to the list of the items on the SSCC. If the quantity in stock does not match with the quantity in the inventory, the system updates the quantity in the inventory. After the system update, the counting can be continued on another SSCC.

10.2.3. Count items on location

Identify location

Identify the location for which cycle counting has to be done.

Identify product

Select the item to count on the location. It is possible to scan the GTIN on the product or the GS1/EAN128 barcode on the logistic unit (in case of a mono pallet). When selecting a product manually, the complete item list will open, as it is always possible that any item which has not been registered administratively at that location, may be present there.

Empty location

If the location is empty, press on the ‘Location is empty’ button. After pressing the button, the system will ask for confirmation whether the location is empty or not. When pressing the ‘Yes’ button, the system books this location as an empty location and the counting can be continued on another location. Scan an SSCC. If there is no SSCC present, press the ‘No SSCC’ button.

Enter batch data

If there is no GS1/EAN128 product barcode on the logistic unit, the system will ask to enter additional information about the product manually, e.g. the batch number, second batch number, and/or the best before date. If there is a GS1/EAN128 barcode on the logistic unit, the system would have recorded this information directly.

Adjust quantity

Enter the quantity.

Add new item or finish process

After the confirmation of the quantity, the system asks whether to count an additional item at that location. When pressing ‘Yes’, the counting process will proceed with a new item. When pressing ‘No’, the system calculates if there is a difference between the quantity of items counted on the location and the registered quantity in the inventory report.

When there is no difference, the system will display an empty ‘Difference stock’ screen.

When there is a difference, the following will be shown on the screen:

  • In the case the difference is positive, the handheld will show a blue arrow pointing upward. (Items with differing batch data will be counted as a new item as well.)
  • In the case the counted item is new for this location, the handheld will show a green arrow pointing upwards to the right.
  • In the case the difference is negative (i.e. less stock at the location than registered in inventory), the handheld will show a red arrow pointing downwards to the right and add a minus sign before the quantity.

Press the right arrow button to confirm the differences. After that, the system books positive differences as “Goods Receipt” and negative differences as “Goods Issue”. The pricelist defined on the Cycle count controller is used on these documents.

Cancel cycle count

To cancel the process, press the left arrow button. The system will check whether there are already entered stock. If there are, the system will ask for confirmation.

  • When clicking ‘Yes’, the list of counted stock will be cleared, and no bookings will be done. This can be considered a ‘cancellation’ of the counted stock.
  • When clicking ‘No’ the cycle count process can be continued.

10.2.4. Additional information

The PMX_CYCO table is populated when the differences are shown on the Mobile Client and the user taps the right arrow button to confirm that the process is completed.

10.3. Cycle count

Without taskWith taskCount everythingCount SSCCCount items on locationScan SSCCScan itemEnter batch dataAdd quantityIdentify itemScan itemEnter batch dataAdd quantityProcess cycle count

Select the “Cycle counting” function on the handheld terminal.
Select the cycle count task:

  • With task: When selecting this task, only locations with the option ‘Location needs to be counted now’ set to true are allowed.
  • Without task: When selecting this task, all locations with the option ‘Allow to be counted during cycle count’ set to true are allowed.

10.3.1. Cycle count with task

Office
Tasks can be made for the cycle counting process. Tasks allow users to plan the cycle counting.

The settings on this screen can be used to limit the locations that will need to be counted. After pressing the ‘Update’ button, it will set the property ‘Needs to be counted now’ on the selected location(s) to true.

Pick locations, non-pick locations, reception dock, shipping dock, production lines
Select the type of locations to perform the actions on.

Only when cycle count requirements are met
When this setting is set to true, the cycle count settings (like number of days, number of operations, …) on location and cycle count controller are checked. Only locations where these requirements are met will be used to perform the actions.

Warehouse
Select the warehouse. If no warehouse is selected all warehouses are used.

Zone
After selecting a warehouse, all zones in this warehouse will be listed here. Select a zone to only use the locations in this zone. If no zone is selected, all zones are used.

Location from… to
Select location(s) which needs to be counted.

Lock location for user
Select a user to lock the locations for. If no user is selected, the location(s) will not be locked. When a user is selected, the locations that are found using the entered selection criteria will be locked for this user. This means stock on these locations cannot be used. Only the selected user can perform the cycle counting task on the handheld device. This option can be used to divide the cycle counting task for users.

Item group
Select an item group. The property ‘Needs to be counted’ will be set to true on locations where the items from the group are stored.

Item from… to
Select item(s). The property ‘Needs to be counted’ will be set to true on locations where the selected item(s) are stored.

Remove count task from selected locations
If this is set to true, the property ‘Needs to be counted’ on location will be set to false.

Remove lock from selected locations
Remove the lock on the selected locations.

Shopfloor

All screens regarding the cycle count will have the prefix ‘Cycle count:‘ on the screen title. This is done because when the user needs to perform cycle count during other operations, it is visually clear that he is performing a cycle count.

Select the option ‘Cycle count’ and then ‘With task’.

If there are no locations which needs to be counted, the system will display the message ‘No more zones to count’.
If there are locations which needs to be counted, the system will display the list of zones where those location(s) are located. Select a zone.

After selecting a zone, select a location from the list. Only locations that need to be counted and have no locking, or are locked for the current user, are displayed in the list.
After the user has selected the location, this location will be locked for this user. No other user will see this location in the list of locations to be counted.

When the cycle count type is ‘Registration’, the system will check if there are open registrations. When there are open registrations, the system asks whether to remove those registrations. Press ‘Yes’ for clearing the previous registrations. In this case only new registrations will be used. Press ‘No’ for keeping the previous registrations. In this case, new registrations will be added to the already existing registrations.

Select a task:

  • Count everything: count all the items on this location.
  • Count SSCC’s: count all full logistic units on the location.

Note: Full logistic units in the system are SSCC’s where no stock has been removed yet.

10.3.1.1. Count everything
Scan SSCC

Scan the SSCC or press the ‘No SSCC’ button if there is no SSCC present.

To stop the process, press the ‘Stop’ button.

Empty location
If the location is empty press the ‘Location is empty’ button. After pressing the button, the system will ask whether the location is empty. Press the ‘Yes’ button to confirm. Then the system will display the list of differences in stock if configured. When proceeding, the differences will be registered according to the type of cycle count (Lost and Found, Registration).

Scan item

Scan the product barcode. When no barcode is present, press the ‘Select product’ button and select it from a list. This list contains all the products.

Enter batch data

If there is no GS1/EAN128 product barcode on the logistic unit, the system will ask to enter additional information about the product manually, e.g. the batch number, second batch number, and/or the best before date (if applicable). If there is a GS1/EAN128 barcode on the logistic unit, the system would have recorded this information directly. After the batch information has been entered, the system will check if the combination of batch/BBD is known in the system. If this is not the case, confirm that the batch/BBD is not known.

Add quantity

Enter the quantity. For more information about how to enter the quantity please see: Screens for entering additional information.

When the item is managed by 'On every transaction' SAP serial numbers and the track location option is enabled, the quantity must be defined by scanning the serial numbers.

When the item is managed by ’On release only’ SAP serial numbers and the track location option is enabled, the quantity must be entered manually. When there is a negative difference and there are existing serial numbers on the location, the missing serial numbers can be selected during processing the count.

When the item has PMX serial numbers and track location enabled, the quantity can be defined by scanning the serial numbers or entering the quantity. If the 'Force serial numbers during cycle count' option is enabled for the item, then the quantity can only be added by scanning the serial numbers.

When the item has serial numbers but the track location option is not enabled, the quantity can only be defined by entering it manually. However Produmex does not support these items in the ‘Process’ step of the cycle count.

Add new item or finish the process

After entering the quantity, proceed with the next item on the location. The system will display the ‘Cycle count: Scan an SSCC’ screen, however the ‘Location is empty’ button will not be displayed.

After counting all the items on the location, press the ‘Stop’ button.
When pressing the ‘Stop’ button, a confirmation to stop the cycle count is asked.

  • Press ‘No’ to proceed with other items on the location.
  • Press ‘Yes’ to finish the cycle count. After pressing the button, the differences will be shown if configured. When proceeding, the differences will be registered according to the type of cycle count (Lost and Found, Registration).
Cancel cycle count

To cancel the process, press the left arrow button. The system will check whether there are already entered stock. If there are, the system will ask for confirmation.

  • When clicking ‘Yes’, the list of counted stock will be cleared, and no bookings will be done. This can be considered a ‘cancellation’ of the counted stock.
  • When clicking ‘No’ the cycle count process can be continued.
10.3.1.2. Count SSCC's

Enter the number of full SSCC’s.

If the number of the entered SSCC’s does not correspond to the number of full SSCC’s in the system, the system requires to perform the ‘Count everything’ cycle count task.

If the number of entered SSCC’s corresponds to the number of full SSCC’s in the system, the system will ask to enter the data for the partial SSCC’s.

When there are partial SSCC’s on the location, proceed by scanning the SSCC on the partial logistic unit or press the ‘No SSCC’ button. Then the ‘Count everything’ cycle count task will be performed for those logistic units.

When there are no partial SSCC’s, press the ‘Location has no partial SSCC’s’ button. Then the system will ask whether there are partial SSCC’s on the location. Confirm this action.

10.3.2. Cycle count no task

Scan or select a location.
After identifying the location, select a task:

  • Count everything: count all the items on this location.
  • Count SSCC’s: count all full logistic units on the location.
  • Count items on location: count only a certain product on the location.

10.3.2.1. Count everything
Scan SSCC

Scan the SSCC or press the ‘No SSCC’ button if there is no SSCC present.

To stop the process, press the ‘Stop’ button.

Empty location
If the location is empty press the ‘Location is empty’ button. After pressing the button, the system will ask whether the location is empty. Press the ‘Yes’ button to confirm. Then the system will display the list of differences in stock if configured. When proceeding, the differences will be registered according to the type of cycle count (Lost and Found, Registration).

Scan item

Scan the product barcode. When no barcode is present, press the ‘Select product’ button and select it from a list. This list contains all the products.

Enter batch data

If there is no GS1/EAN128 product barcode on the logistic unit, the system will ask to enter additional information about the product manually, e.g. the batch number, second batch number, and/or the best before date (if applicable). If there is a GS1/EAN128 barcode on the logistic unit, the system would have recorded this information directly. After the batch information has been entered, the system will check if the combination of batch/BBD is known in the system. If this is not the case, confirm that the batch/BBD is not known.

Add quantity

Enter the quantity. For more information about how to enter the quantity please see: Screens for entering additional information.

When the item is managed by 'On every transaction' SAP serial numbers and the track location option is enabled, the quantity must be defined by scanning the serial numbers.

When the item is managed by ’On release only’ SAP serial numbers and the track location option is enabled, the quantity must be entered manually. When there is a negative difference and there are existing serial numbers on the location, the missing serial numbers can be selected during processing the count.

When the item has PMX serial numbers and track location enabled, the quantity can be defined by scanning the serial numbers or entering the quantity. If the 'Force serial numbers during cycle count' option is enabled for the item, then the quantity can only be added by scanning the serial numbers.

When the item has serial numbers but the track location option is not enabled, the quantity can only be defined by entering it manually. However Produmex does not support these items in the ‘Process’ step of the cycle count.

Add new item or finish the process

After entering the quantity, proceed with the next item on the location. The system will display the ‘Cycle count: Scan an SSCC’ screen, however the ‘Location is empty’ button will not be displayed.

After counting all the items on the location, press the ‘Stop’ button.
When pressing the ‘Stop’ button, a confirmation to stop the cycle count is asked.

  • Press ‘No’ to proceed with other items on the location.
  • Press ‘Yes’ to finish the cycle count. After pressing the button, the differences will be shown if configured. When proceeding, the differences will be registered according to the type of cycle count (Lost and Found, Registration).
Cancel cycle count

To cancel the process, press the left arrow button. The system will check whether there are already entered stock. If there are, the system will ask for confirmation.

  • When clicking ‘Yes’, the list of counted stock will be cleared, and no bookings will be done. This can be considered a ‘cancellation’ of the counted stock.
  • When clicking ‘No’ the cycle count process can be continued.
10.3.2.2. Count SSCC

Enter the number of full SSCC’s.

If the number of the entered SSCC’s does not correspond to the number of full SSCC’s in the system, the system requires to perform the ‘Count everything’ cycle count task.

If the number of entered SSCC’s corresponds to the number of full SSCC’s in the system, the system will ask to enter the data for the partial SSCC’s.

When there are partial SSCC’s on the location, proceed by scanning the SSCC on the partial logistic unit or press the ‘No SSCC’ button. Then the ‘Count everything’ cycle count task will be performed for those logistic units.

When there are no partial SSCC’s, press the ‘Location has no partial SSCC’s’ button. Then the system will ask whether there are partial SSCC’s on the location. Confirm this action.

10.3.2.3. Count items on location
Identify the product

Scan the product. When no barcode is present, press the ‘Select product’ button and select it from a list. This list contains all the products.

Empty location
If the location is empty press the ‘Location is empty’ button. After pressing the button, the system will ask whether the location is empty. Press the ‘Yes’ button to confirm. Then the system will display the list of differences in stock if configured. When proceeding, the differences will be registered according to the type of cycle count (Lost and Found, Registration).

Scan SSCC

Scan the SSCC the item is on. If there is no SSCC present press the ‘No SSCC’ button.

Enter batch data

If there is no GS1/EAN128 product barcode on the logistic unit, the system will ask to enter additional information about the product manually, e.g. the batch number, second batch number, and/or the best before date (if applicable). If there is a GS1/EAN128 barcode on the logistic unit, the system would have recorded this information directly. After the batch information has been entered, the system will check if the combination of batch/BBD is known in the system. If this is not the case, confirm that the batch/BBD is not known.

Add quantity

Enter the quantity. For more information about how to enter the quantity please see: Screens for entering additional information.

When the item is managed by 'On every transaction' SAP serial numbers and the track location option is enabled, the quantity must be defined by scanning the serial numbers.

When the item is managed by ’On release only’ SAP serial numbers and the track location option is enabled, the quantity must be entered manually. When there is a negative difference and there are existing serial numbers on the location, the missing serial numbers can be selected during processing the count.

When the item has PMX serial numbers and track location enabled, the quantity can be defined by scanning the serial numbers or entering the quantity. If the 'Force serial numbers during cycle count' option is enabled for the item, then the quantity can only be added by scanning the serial numbers.

When the item has serial numbers but the track location option is not enabled, the quantity can only be defined by entering it manually. However Produmex does not support these items in the ‘Process’ step of the cycle count.

Finish process

After entering the quantity, proceed with the next logistic unit on the location. The system will display the ‘Cycle count: Scan an SSCC’ screen, however the ‘Location is empty’ button will not be displayed.

After counting the total stock for the item on the location, press the ‘Stop’ button.
When pressing the ‘Stop’ button, a confirmation to stop the cycle count is asked.

  • Press ‘No’ to proceed with other logistic units on the location.
  • Press ‘Yes’ to finish the cycle count. After pressing the button, the differences will be shown if configured. When proceeding, the differences will be registered according to the type of cycle count (Lost and Found, Registration).
Cancel cycle count

To cancel the process, press the left arrow button. The system will check whether there are already entered stock. If there are, the system will ask for confirmation.

  • When clicking ‘Yes’, the list of counted stock will be cleared, and no bookings will be done. This can be considered a ‘cancellation’ of the counted stock.
  • When clicking ‘No’ the cycle count process can be continued.

10.3.3. Cycle count during other operations

When the cycle counting needs to be done during other operations, the system will display the message ‘This location needs to be counted’. After pressing the ‘Ok’ button, a ‘Cycle count’ type process can be started.

Based on the cycle count controller configurations, the system might allow to skip the count. When the skipping is allowed, and extra ‘Skip count’ button will appear. For skipping the count, select the ‘Skip count’ button or press the left arrow button.
If configured, the system displays a list of reasons for the skipping. Select a reason.

When the skipping is not allowed, the normal ‘Cycle count’ process will be performed. When pressing the left arrow button, the system will display a warning message that the count cannot be skipped.

10.3.4. Additional information

The PMX_CYCO table is populated when the differences are shown on the Mobile Client and the user clicks the Update button in the Select Locations to Count window to confirm that the process is completed.

10.4. Process

In case of the Cycle Count Flow, for processing the counted data open the Process window from the Produmex menu. This window displays all the differences counted according the cycle count type.

Warehouse
The warehouse where the cycle count has been performed.
Remarks
Remarks to be added to the issue and/or receipt.
Posting date
The posting date of the issue and/or receipt.
G/L Account receipt/issue
The G/L account to use for the issues and/or receipts. (It must be set only when using Perpetual Inventory and if it is set on the controller.)

10.4.1. Process Lost and Found

If there are multiple rows in the list, selected rows can be removed by pressing the Delete button. This deletes the entries from the list to process, but the data is not deleted from the database. Deleted rows appear again after the list is refreshed.

It is possible to process the counted difference in multiple steps. Adjust the quantity on the grid before processing the row.

Example: The quantity on the row is 64. If you want to process only 20, change the quantity to 20. When processing the row, only 20 is processed, and the remaining 44 can be processed later.

The item cost is the item cost for the given warehouse (OITW.AvgPrice) when the following verifies:

  • The Item Groups Valuation Method is Moving Average (OADM.InvntSystm = ‘A’) for the company.
  • The Manage Item Cost per Warehouse option is enabled (OADM.PriceSys = ‘Y’) for the company.

In other cases this will be the item cost (OITM.AvgPrice).

Note: When performing a goods receipt or a goods issue, the system uses the price list set on the Cycle Count Controller.

A negative quantity means that there is not enough stock in the system. When processing this, a goods receipt is booked to add stock to the system.

A positive quantity means that there is too much stock in the system. A goods issue is booked to correct this.

After clicking the Update button, the selected rows in the grid are processed and the system informs you that the processing is done. The list is refreshed.

Note: Goods issues can only be performed if the stock is not currently locked. If this is the case, the locking should be removed before processing the cycle count.

Recommendation when using cycle count type Lost and Found:
If cycle counting during other operations is used, or cycle counting is performed while other processes (e.g. picking, production) still take place, it is recommended to regularly process the counted locations.

Example:
There is no stock in the system of ProductA. Location A1 is counted, and 10 pieces of ProductA are found. On the Lost and Found location, the stock of ProductA is -10, and on location A1 there are 10 pieces. The sum of that stock is 0, and that corresponds to the stock available in SAP.

Because there is now 10 pieces of ProductA on location A1, it is possible to make a picklist for this stock and pick the items, but if the user tries to ship the items, an error occurs because the stock is not known in SAP. The processing of the cycle count needs to be done first. A goods receipt of 10 pieces of ProductA is booked, so the stock in SAP contains 10 pieces of ProductA. The shipping of the pick list can be performed.

10.4.2. Process Registration

If there are multiple rows in the list, the selected rows can be removed by pressing the Delete button. This deletes the entries from the list to process, but the data is not deleted from the database. Deleted rows appear again after the list is refreshed.

It is possible to process less than the counted difference.
Example: The counted difference is -32. The quantity can be changed to -20. When processing the row, only 20 is processed and the remaining 12 do not reappear on the list. It is not possible to change the quantity to process to -34.

The item cost will be the item cost for the given warehouse (OITW.AvgPrice) when the following verifies:

  • The Item Groups Valuation Method is ‘Moving Average’ (OADM.InvntSystm = ‘A’) for the company
  • The Manage Item Cost per Warehouse option is enabled (OADM.PriceSys = ‘Y’) for the company

In other cases this will be the item cost (OITM.AvgPrice).

Note: When performing a goods receipt or a goods issue, the system uses the price list set on the Cycle Count Controller.

Contrary to the cycle count type Lost and Found, the processing of the positive and negative quantity is done oppositely.
A positive quantity means that there is not enough stock in the system. When processing this, a goods receipt is booked to add stock to the system. A negative quantity means that there is too much stock in the system. A goods issue is booked to correct this.

After clicking the Update button, all rows in the grid are processed. After processing, the system informs you that the processing has been done and the list is refreshed. If there have been deleted rows, they appear again in the list.

Note: Goods issues can only be performed if the stock is not currently locked. If this is the case, the locking should be removed before processing the cycle count.

10.4.3. Adjust price

When the Manually set price on processing the count option is enabled on the Cycle Count Controller, the price of the items can be adjusted.

Four additional columns are displayed on the screen:

  • Enter new price: Add the new price for the item to this field. By default, it is filled with the value from the Item Cost field. The price of a catch weight item cannot be adjusted on this field.
  • Price/weight: The price per weight ratio of the catch weight items. It is calculated based on: ((Total pieces x item cost)/Default weight ratio)
  • Enter new price/weight: Add a new price per weight ratio for the catch weight item on this field to adjust the price.
  • Total new price: the new total cost by item.
    • For normal items the new total price is calculated based on: (Number of pieces x New price)
    • For catch weight items the new total price is calculated based on: (Weight x New price/weight)

After processing the cycle count, the value from the Total new price column is added to the goods receipt/ goods issue document.

10.5. Serial Numbers

On the Produmex > Cycle count menu there is an option to list and remove missing serial numbers. Serial Numbers

Type
Displays the filtering conditions for the items in the list. Select the serial number type on the combo box. The following items can be listed:

  • items managed by PMX serial number with track location, but the linked LUID is no longer in stock
  • items managed by SAP serial number with track location, but the linked LUID is no longer in stock
  • items managed by PMX serial number without track location, but the batch is not in stock

Item
Filter the list by selecting an item. Only items having PMX serial numbers or SAP serial numbers with track location can be selected.

To remove serial numbers, select their line and click on the ‘Remove’ button.

11. Container Management

11.1. Configuration

11.1.1. Container management controller

Adjust the settings for container management in the ’Container management controller’. For more information about the controller see: 5.1.3.10. Container management controller

11.2. Office

11.2.1. Open documents report

To see the list of open containers, open the ‘Open document report’.
Select ‘Container’ as the document type. The list of open containers will be displayed. A container can be closed by selecting the container(s) and clicking the ‘Close document’ button.
It is possible to filter the list based on the items in the document. Add an item to the ‘Item’ field.

11.2.2. Container management form

The Container Management form can be accessed by two paths:

  • Produmex > Sales > Container management
    The document type will be ‘Sales’ by default.
  • Produmex > Purchase > Container management
    The document type will be ‘Purchase’ by default.

Number
This is the key used to uniquely identify the container.

Container code
The code of the container.

Container description
The description of the container.

Expedition number
The number of the expedition. This value is for information only.

Business partner
The CardCode and the name of the Business partner. On ‘Sales’ type containers only customers, and on ‘Purchase’ type containers only vendors can be selected. After a business partner has been selected, only documents linked to that partner can be added.
On ‘Route’ type containers no business partner can be selected.

Bill of lading number
The number of the Bill of Lading document. This value is for information only.

Proof of delivery reference
Reference for the proof of delivery. This value is for information only.

Maximum volume (weight, price)
The maximum volume (weight, price) a container can have. If no check on volume (weight, price) needs to be done, this can be set to 0 (zero). The uom for the volume (weight) can be selected. The price is the local currency defined in SAP.

Total volume (weight, price)
This is the total volume (weight, price) of the document lines linked to the container. The color this control gets, is based on the settings on the Container management controller.

Total open volume (weight, price)
This is the total open volume (weight, price) of the document lines linked to the container. The color this control gets, is based on the settings on the Container management controller.

# packages
The number of the packages. This value is for information only.

Voyage (in days)
The length of the voyage in days. When the value in this field is 0, the user can modify the value in the ‘Estimated date of arrival’ field.

Estimated date of departure
The estimated date of departure.

ETA port
The estimated time of arrival at the destination port. The field is autofilled based on the following calculation: ‘Estimated date of departure’ and the ‘Lead Time’ linked to the selected ‘Delivery type’ of the ‘Port of destination’.
Note that this field is not autofilled if the value of Voyage (in days) is 0.

Estimated date of arrival
The estimated date of arrival at the warehouse. The default value is calculated based on the ‘ETA port’ field and the ‘Lead Time In Days Between Port And Warehouse’ set in the Container management controller. When the value in the ‘Voyage(in days)’ field is zero, this field can be modified by the user.

Actual arrival date to port
The actual date of the arrival to the port.

Actual delivery date
The actual date of the delivery.

Emptied at
The date when the container was emptied.

Actual dehire date
The actual date when the container was dehired.

Type
The type of the container. Possible values can be ‘Purchase’, ‘Sales’ or ‘Route’. Once a line has been added to the container, the type of container cannot be changed anymore.

Container status
The status a container can have. Possible values can be ‘Open’, ‘In transit’, ‘Delivered’ or ‘Closed’.

  • Open: All data can be changed except number.
  • In transit: The container is in transit.
  • Delivered: The container is delivered.

When the container status is ‘In transit’ or ‘Delivered’, only the following data can be changed:

  • Container description
  • Bill of lading number
  • Proof of delivery reference
  • Voyage(in days)
  • Estimated date of arrival
  • Actual arrival date to port
  • Actual delivery date
  • Emptied at
  • Actual dehire date
  • Container shipping status
  • Incident type

Closed: The container is closed. No more data can be changed.

Container shipping status
The shipping status of the container.

Shipping type
The shipping type of the container. This value is for information only.

Incident type
The type of the incident. Every Reason that can be used for containers can be selected.

Port of origin
The port of origin. Every port defined in the (PMX_PORT) UDT can be selected.

Port of destination
The port of destination. Every port defined in the (PMX_PORT) UDT can be selected.

Delivery type
The type of the delivery. The possible values are: Normal/ Express.

Delete line
Select one or more lines, and click button ‘Delete line’ to delete the lines from the container.

Close document
Click button ‘Close document’ to close the container.

Cancel
Click on the button to close the screen.

Add lines/ Document
Document lines can be linked to a container.

In case of ‘Sales’ and ‘Purchase’ type of containers, click on the ‘Add lines’ button. According to the type of container, purchase orders or sales orders will be listed.

After a business partner has been added to a container, only documents linked to that selected business partner can be added.

Only open document lines not linked to an open container will be added.
It is possible to ship one order line in multiple containers. After adding the order line to the first container, adjust the quantity on the ‘Open quantity’ field on the grid. When adding this order line to the next container, the remaining quantity will be default and also the maximum quantity that can be added.
Select the order(s) and click on ‘Ok’.

In case of ‘Route’ type of containers, click in the ‘Document’ field and press tab. Select the route(s) and click on ‘Choose’ to add them to the container. Container lines of a container of type ‘Route’ are linked to the complete route. A document (line) can only be added to one open container.

11.2.3. Route

When a route is linked to a container, an extra control is shown on the route planning screen. The code of the container is shown. The arrow on the left can be clicked to open the container this route is linked to. Next to the container code are the values for volume, weight and price. If no maximum value is set, the total amount is shown with the corresponding uom. In case a maximum value is set, the total amount and maximum amount is shown. Also the percentage is indicated. The colors are based on the settings in the Container management controller.

11.3. Shopfloor

11.3.1. Reception

In the reception flow an option for the container has been added.
During the reception flow, select the option ‘Container’. A list of containers of type ‘Purchase’ and with status ‘In transit’ will be shown. After selecting the container, the normal receiving process can be continued. Only open items in the container will be received.
When no container is found, the system will display a ‘There was no container found’ message.

When the ‘Auto close container when delivered? (Y/N)’ option is set to true, the container will be closed after every line have been received. When this option is not flagged, the status of the container will be changed to ‘Delivered’ after the reception.

12. Move Guide

Moves can be used to transfer stock within or between warehouses. Produmex offers several specialized flows for the different scenarios in stock relocation:

  • ‘Ad hoc movement’: to move stock within or between PMX managed warehouses without a move order created in the office environment
  • ‘Move order’: to move stock within or between PMX managed warehouses based on move orders created in the office environment
  • ‘Replenish pick locations’: to move stock based on system generated replenishment orders
  • ‘Consolidated move’: to execute ad hoc moves in a group within a PMX warehouse
  • ‘Move from WA location’: to move stock from a warehouse automation location
  • ‘Receive from WHS’: to move stock from a warehouse not managed by PMX to a PMX warehouse

To execute the flows on the shopfloor follow the next path on the handheld terminal: Logistic > Move.

Default location calculation

When the location suggestion is enabled for the warehouse, the Default location is the first suggested location calculated based on the logic described in Location suggestions.

When the location suggestion is not enabled for the warehouse, the Default location is the standard location set for the given warehouse on the Produmex Inventory tab of the Item Master Data of the item. If the items to move have different standard location set for the warehouse, no default location is displayed.

12.1. Ad hoc moves
12.2. Move orders
12.3. Replenishment
12.4. Consolidated move
12.5. Receive from WHS flow
12.6. Move from WA location

View move documents
When a movement has been carried out on the shopfloor, it is also registered administratively in the Produmex Office module where it can be consulted. To see the movements, open the ’Move’ screen via the following path: Produmex > Inventory > Move. Move screen

12.1. Ad hoc moves

Ad-hoc moves are used to move stock without a move order. The movement can be performed both in the office environment and on the shopfloor.

12.1.1. Configuration

Set the default warehouses
Set default warehouses for the thin client. For more information about thin client settings see: 5.2.10. Thin client settings

12.1.1.2. Move controller
Adjust the settings for the ad hoc moves in the move controller. For more information about the move controller see: 5.1.3.58. Move controller

12.1.2. Ad-hoc movements in the office

Select stock line(s) from the Inventory Report. Click on the ’Move’ button and select the ’Perform move’ option from the dropdown menu.

On the ‘Perform Move’ window, select a destination location from the dropdown menu. Every active location of the company can be selected./ Both local moves and warehouse transfers can be performed. Add the quantity. By default the quantity is the quantity of the stock line. The entered quantity cannot exceed the quantity of the stock in the line. Press the ‘Execute’ button to perform the move.

Please note: Only authorized users can perform ad-hoc moves in the office. For more information please see: Authorizations

12.1.3. Ad-hoc movements on the shopfloor

To initiate the flow, follow the next path: Logistic > Move > Ad hoc movement

Select move typeSelect warehouseSelect move taskFull logistic unitScan an SSCCIdentify destination locationPartial logistic unitIdentify source locationScan an SSCCIdentify productEnter quantityIdentify destination location/SSCCMultiple logistic unitsScan the SSCC’sScan the destination location or GS1 labelBulk moveIdentify pick locationIdentify destination locationEnter quantity

When there is only one or no default warehouse set for the thin client, only local moves are allowed. When there are more than one default warehouses set for the thin client, warehouse transfers can be executed as well between the default warehouses.

In order to be able perform ad hoc moves into a non-Produmex managed warehouse, set up the warehouse in the following way:

  1. On the Warehouse – Setup window set the ’Is managed by Produmex?’ user defined field to ’False’.
  2. On the Organizational Structure create a Warehouse type location for the given warehouse and select the SBO warehouse as the ’Warehouse’.
  3. Create a Dock type location under the warehouse and enable the ’Active’, ’Loading’ and ’Unloading’ checkboxes.

Select move type

Select the move type. To move stock within the warehouse, press ‘Local move’. To move stock between warehouses, press ‘Warehouse transfer’.

Select warehouse

When executing a warehouse transfer, select the destination warehouse. Only the default warehouses set for the thin client can be selected.

Select move task
12.1.3.1. Full logistic unit

Press the ’Full logistic unit’ button to move a full logistic unit.

Scan an SSCC

Scan the SSCC on the logistic unit to move.

Identify destination location

Scan the destination location or select it from a list after pressing the ‘Select other location’ button. In case of a warehouse transfer, only locations from the selected warehouse can be scanned or selected.

When the location suggestion is enabled for the warehouse, the Default location is the first suggested location calculated based on the logic described in Location suggestions.

When the location suggestion is not enabled for the warehouse, the Default location is the standard location set for the given warehouse on the Produmex Inventory tab of the Item Master Data of the item. If the items to move have different standard location set for the warehouse, no default location is displayed.

When the location suggestion is not enabled, an additional ‘Select empty location’ button will be displayed. To execute the move to an empty location, press this button and select a location from the list.

In case of a warehouse transfer, the ‘Warehouse: move has been added (701)’ print event will be triggered after the destination location had been selected, if the print event is defined.

Note: Assigning a logistic carrier to a Master SSCC is not supported.

Logistic unit/ items are moved

After scanning or selecting the new destination location, the ad-hoc movement is registered and the system displays the message: Logistic unit/Items are moved. The movement is booked as a ‘Move’ in case of local moves, or as a ‘Warehouse transfer’ in case of warehouse transfers.

12.1.3.2. Partial logistic unit

To move a partial logistic unit, press the ’Partial logistic unit’ button.

Identify source location

Identify the pick location or select it from a list after pressing the ’Select location’ button.

Scan an SSCC

Scan the SSCC to move. Only SSCC’s linked to the selected location can be scanned.

Identify product

If the No SSCC button is tapped, the system can move all the stock of the product regardless of whether or not the stock has an SSCC. If it has one or more SSCCs, the system chooses the SSCC to move.

When there are more than one item on the logistic unit/SSCC, or the Always scan product? option is enabled on the Move controller, the system will display a list of those items. Identify the item by scanning or selecting it from the list. When there is only one item on the logistic unit/pick location, the system will automatically proceed with that item.

When the item has more than one batch on that location, a list of batches will be displayed. Identify the product by selecting the batch. When there is only one batch, the system will automatically proceed with that batch.

Enter quantity

Enter the quantity to move. For more information about adding the quantity in Produmex see: 4.3.4. Screens for entering additional information

Identify destination location/SSCC

To move the selected products to an existing SSCC, scan the SSCC. If the scanned SSCC is not in stock, identify the destination location on the next screen. The products will be moved to that logistic unit and location. Then the system will go back to the ‘Scan source location or GS1 label’ screen.

To create a new logistic unit, press the ‘New SSCC’ button then identify the destination location.

To move the selected products without changing the logistic unit, scan or select a location from a list.

When moving a partial pallet and the SSCC was not defined in this step (either by scanning an existing one or by creating a new one), then the products will be moved without a linked SSCC.

Scan the destination location or select it from a list after pressing the ‘Select other location’ button. When the location suggestion option is not enabled to the warehouse, the system will display an additional ‘Select empty location’ button. To execute the move to an empty location, press this button and select a location from the list.

When the location suggestion is enabled for the warehouse, the Default location is the first suggested location calculated based on the logic described in Location suggestions.

When the location suggestion is not enabled for the warehouse, the Default location is the standard location set for the given warehouse on the Produmex Inventory tab of the Item Master Data of the item. If the items to move have different standard location set for the warehouse, no default location is displayed.

In case of a warehouse transfer, the ‘Warehouse: move has been added (701)’ print event will be triggered after the destination location had been selected, if the print event is defined.

In case of a new SSCC has been created, the ‘Warehouse: a new LU has been created (700)’ print event will be triggered after the destination location had been selected, if the print event is defined.

Logistic unit/ items are moved

After scanning or selecting the destination location, the ad-hoc movement is registered and the system displays the message: Logistic unit/Items are moved.

The movement is booked as ‘Move’ in case of local moves or as a ‘Warehouse transfer’ in case of warehouse transfers.

12.1.3.3. Multiple logistic units

To move multiple logistic units at once, press the ’Multiple logistic units’ button.

Scan the SSCC’s

Scan the SSCC’s to move. The already scanned SSCC’s will be displayed in a list. After having all the SSCC’s to move scanned, proceed with the right arrow button.

Scan the destination location or GS1 label

Scan the destination location or select it from a list after pressing the ’Select other location’ button.

To group the scanned SSCC into a master SSCC, press the ’Move to new master SSCC’ button then select the destination location.

When the location suggestion is enabled for the warehouse, the Default location is the first suggested location calculated based on the logic described in Location suggestions.

When the location suggestion is not enabled for the warehouse, the Default location is the standard location set for the given warehouse on the Produmex Inventory tab of the Item Master Data of the item. If the items to move have different standard location set for the warehouse, no default location is displayed.

When the location suggestion is not enabled, an additional ‘Select empty location’ button will be displayed. To execute the move to an empty location, press this button and select a location from the list.

In case of a warehouse transfer, the Warehouse: move has been added (701)’ print event will be triggered after the destination location had been selected, if the print event is defined.

In case of a new master SSCC has been created, the ‘Warehouse: a new master LU has been created (702)’ print event will be triggered after the destination location had been selected, if the print event is defined.

Logistic unit/ items are moved

After identifying the destination location, the ad-hoc movement is registered and the system displays the message: Logistic unit/Items are moved.

The movement is booked as ‘Move’ in case of local moves or as a ‘Warehouse transfer’ in case of warehouse transfers.

12.1.3.4. Bulk move

The bulk move will take stock from a silo/tank and move it to another silo/tank. The stock to move will be calculated by the consumption algorithm defined on the silo/tank.

Identify pick location

Identify the source silo/tank by scanning or selecting it from a list after pressing the ’Select location’ button.

Identify destination location

Then identify the destination location. This location also should be a silo or a tank. Scan or select the location from a list after pressing the ’Select location’ button.

Enter quantity

After selecting the destination location, add the quantity to move. For more information about adding the quantity in Produmex see: 4.3.4. Screens for entering additional information

Items are moved

After pressing the right arrow button, the move will be booked.

12.2. Move orders

There is a possibility to prepare moves by adding move orders in the office environment. The moves can be executed on the shopfloor.

12.2.1. Office

12.2.1.1. Order entry

There are two ways to add a move order to the system.
The first way is to select stock in the inventory report of Produmex.
One or more rows can be selected to group them in one move order. It is possible to select different items or products. Products stored on different locations can also be selected in one move order. The only limitation is that all the products to move should be in the same warehouse.
After selecting the stock to move, click on the ’Move’ button and select the ’Make move order’ option.
After clicking the ‘Make move order’ button the screen with the data of the move order is shown. This screen shows the details of the stock that needs to be moved. The system has copied the data from the current status in the inventory report.
Fill in the destination location, warehouse and LUID.

The second way to add a move order is to start from an empty move order and filling the needed data. Click on the menu entry ‘Move order’.

12.2.1.2. Move order screen

Header
Number
This is the number of the move order. This will be filled in when the move order is added.

Due Date
The due date of the move order. When entering a new move order the current date is used.

Type
The type of the move cannot be selected as the system will decide which type the order is based on the properties of the order. In case of moving stock within a warehouse, the order type will be ‘Move’. In case of moving stock in between warehouses, the order type will be ‘Warehouse transfer’. ‘Put away’ and ‘Replenishment’ type move orders are added to the system automatically and cannot be created by a user.

From warehouse
The source warehouse to move the stock from.

To warehouse
The destination warehouse the stock needs to be stored.

Priority
The priority the move order has.

Remarks
The remarks linked to the move order. When the move order is selected on the shopfloor, this remark will be shown.

Details
Item code – Barcode - Item name
The identification of the product.

Qty – Open Qty
The quantities.

Batch ID
The ITRI key of the stock.

Src. Stor. Loc.
The source location of the stock.

Src. Log. Unit
The source LUID of the stock.

Dest. Stor Loc.
The destination location of the stock. This location should be the same for all lines in the move order. When the source and destination warehouse are the same, all locations in the warehouse are allowed. In case the source and destination warehouse are different, the destination locations can only be the docks on source a destination warehouse.

Dest. Log. Unit.
The destination LUID. If provided, the LUID should be the same for all move order lines.

Quality status
The quality status of the stock.

Src.master log.Unit
The LUID of the master logistic unit where the stock to move is allocated.

Stock Level
The stock level corresponding to the move order line. By default ‘Detail’ is entered. This means all data in the lines are used ‘as is’. So if for example no source LUID is provided, the stock to move cannot have an LUID linked to it.

There is a second stock level ‘Item’. This means only the item and quantity are needed. Source LUID and batch ID are optional. If the data is provided, the user on the shopfloor will have to take the stock from that LUID/batch ID. But if this data is not provided, any batch or LUID can be taken when executing the move on the shopfloor.

The third stock level is ’Master SSCC’. This means that only the source master LUID and the destination location are needed. It is recommended to create move orders with Master SSCC level from an empty move order.

The stock in the move order will not be locked. This means other processes can use this stock if needed. For this reason the system will not check if the stock really exists at time of the creation of the move order. So it is possible that when the move order is executed on the shopfloor, the requested stock is not available anymore. An error message will show this when executing the move order.

12.2.1.3. Open move orders

It is possible to get a list of open move orders. Click on the menu entry ‘Open document report’ and select ‘Move order’ as the document type.

When selecting a move order the data of the move order can be changed if the move order is of type ‘Move order’ or ‘Warehouse transfer’ and if it has the status ‘Nothing moved’. In all other cases only the priority and remarks can be updated.

12.2.2. Shopfloor

MO_FLOW

To execute move order press the ‘Move order’ button.

12.2.2.1. Select move order

Select the move order to execute from the list. The move orders are ordered by priority, due date, move order number. If the move order is of type ‘Warehouse transfer’, it is indicated with an icon. After selecting the move order, the linked remarks will be displayed. Press ‘Ok’ to proceed.

12.2.2.2. Select item

Select an item to move from the list. Only items from the move order will be displayed in the list.

12.2.2.3. Identify source location/SSCC

Provide a source SSCC or location. There are three possibilities to enter the source SSCC or location, based on the data entered in the move order line.

  • LUID is provided on move order line:

In this case the SSCC defined on the move order line has to be scanned. No other SSCC is allowed. The SSCC and location of the SSCC is shown on the screen.

  • Stock level: Item and no LUID is provided on move order line:

When the stock level is ‘Item’ and no source detail was provided, the source LUID and batch are optional.
Identify an SSCC to move. The source location where the SSCC should be stored is shown on the screen.
To get all the stock available for the product to move, press the ‘No SSCC’ button. On the next screen, identify the source location.

  • Stock level = Detail and no LUID is provided:

When the stock level is ‘Detail’ and no source LUID was provided, then the product to move cannot have linked LUID. Because there is no linked LUID, in order to identify the product the source location should be specified first.
Scan the pick location or select it from a list after pressing the ‘Select location’ button. Only the source location set in the order can be added. The source location is displayed on the screen.

12.2.2.4. Identify product

When an SSCC was scanned and all the items on that SSCC were ordered to move, the system skips this step and automatically moves the full SSCC. All screens to further identify the stock will be skipped, and a ‘Moving the full logistic unit… ‘ message will be shown. Press ‘Ok’ to proceed.

Scan the product to move, or select it after pressing the ‘Select a product’ button. Only the products stored on the location/SSCC are shown in the list.

If no SSCC was scanned and there are multiple SSCC’s found for the product on the location, select an SSCC to move. In case the location has stock that has no SSCC linked to it, an additional ‘No SSCC’ button will be displayed. Select the SSCC to move then proceed with the right arrow button or press the ‘No SSCC’ button to move stock with no linked SSCC.

When moving an item that has products with different batches on the selected location or SSCC, identify the product to move by selecting its batch from a list. The screen will be skipped when there are no different batches.

12.2.2.5. Enter the quantity

Enter the quantity to move. The added quantity cannot exceed the quantity in the move order.

12.2.2.6. Add new item(s)

The entered data is now added to a list of items to move and the system will get back to the ‘Select an item to move’ screen. Select the next move order line and proceed as described above.

12.2.2.7. Stop process

When there are items in the list of items to move, the ‘Stop’ button is enabled. Press the button to execute the move for all items in the list.

12.2.2.8. Go back

To go back, press the left arrow button. A confirmation screen will be shown if there are already added items in the list to move. Press the ‘Yes’ button to clear all the entered data and to go back to the ‘Select move order’ screen. Press the ‘No’ button to proceed.

12.2.2.7. Identify destination location/SSCC

When there are no more items to move, the screen to enter the destination location will be shown.

If an SSCC is scanned, the items will be added to the SSCC.
If the destination LUID is provided on the move order line, the destination SSCC has to be scanned and the screens to enter the destination location will be skipped.
If a location is scanned, the products will be stored on that location. It is possible to select the location from a list after pressing the ‘Select location’ button. When the location was defined in the move order, only the defined location can be scanned or selected.
To select an empty location, press the ‘Select empty location’ button and select it from a list. The locations in the list are locations allowed for the products by zone type.
To add the products to a new SSCC, press the ‘New SSCC’ button, then identify the destination location.
In case of a warehouse transfer, the ‘Warehouse: move has been added (701)’ print event will be triggered after the destination location had been selected, if the print event is defined.
In case of a new SSCC has been created, the ‘Warehouse: a new LU has been created (700)’ print event will be triggered and the logistic label will be printed after the destination location had been selected, if the print event is defined.

12.2.2.9. Logistic unit/Items are moved

After identifying the destination location, the movement is registered and the system confirms that the logistic unit has been moved. The movement will be booked as a ‘Move’ in case of local moves or a ‘Warehouse transfer’ in case of moving stock between warehouses.

Replenishment

Overview

Replenishment can be used within the same SAP Business One / PMX WMS warehouse and the aim of the function is to make sure that enough stock is available on pick locations to perform the picking process for a given period. The function has got two types in Produmex WMS, it can be location or item based.

When replenishment configurations are set for a location or an item, the Replenish Tool automatically creates replenish orders when the conditions below are met.

  • The stock reaches the minimum quantity set for the location or the item.
  • There is available stock on the bulk locations for replenishment.

The generated replenish orders can be executed on the shop floor with the help of the Mobile Client.

Replenishment

Prerequisites

Define your bulk locations (locations not used for picking) and pick locations in your Organizational Structure.

During the process bulk locations are used to replenish pick locations in the warehouse. The replenishment function does not work if all the locations are set as pick locations.

Configuration

1. Set the Replenishment generator

Select the necessary replenishment type (extension) on the Replenishment generator and define the related settings. You can set only one of the two types.

  • Generates replenishment orders (DEREPGEN): Replenishment orders are triggered based on the configurations of pick locations.
  • Generates item based replenishment orders (BREPGEN) : Replenishment orders are triggered based on Item Master Data configurations.
2a. Location based configuration

1. Go to the Organizational Structure and select the necessary bin.

2. On the General tab enable the Pick Location option.

3. On the General tab enable the Can Be Replenished option.

4. Adjust the minimum quantity, the maximum quantity and replenish quantity of the item for the pick location to be replenished.

  • Minimum quantity: When the quantity of an item is below the minimum quantity, the system generates a replenish order.
  • Maximum quantity: The maximum quantity of an item that can be stored in a location.
  • Replenish quantity: It usually refers to a box quantity, e.g. if the replenish quantity is set to 6, the item is stored in a box of 6 pieces.

For information on calculation and examples click here.

2b. Item based configuration

1. Go to Item Master Data > Produmex > Sales tab.

2. Fill in the Replenishment: Quantity on Pick Locations field.

3. Fill in the Estimated Sales Quantity by Month field.

For information on calculation and examples click here.

Item based configuration

3. Run the Replenish Tool

1. Open an empty text file.

2. Add the path of the ReplenishTool.exe file between quotations marks. Press the Space button and add the connection string.

“C:\Program Files\Produmex\Produmex Tools\Produmex.Sbo.Logex.Tools.ReplenishTool.exe” /cs:<connectionstring>

3. Save the text file as a .Bat file. E.g. Run_ReplenishTool.Bat

4. Run the .Bat file to have replenish orders generated.

Tip: Windows Task Sheduler can be used to run the .Bat file frequently (e.g. each hour).

After running the .Bat file, a log file is generated. To check the log file go to SAP Business One > Produmex menu > Reports > Open Document Report > Document Type: Move orders.

Replenish Pick Locations Flow steps

1. Start the flow

On the Mobile Client select Logistics > Move > Replenish Pick Locations.

Start the flow

2. Select a zone

If the Select zone on replenishment flow? option is enabled on the Replenishment generator, select a zone. A zone is listed if there is a location in the zone that is the destination location of a replenish order.

3. Select replenish order line

On the next screen every open line of replenishment orders from the warehouses assigned to the scanner is listed. If a zone was selected, only the lines of replenishment orders for locations that belong to the selected zone are listed.

In the example the replenishment order (1036) for a specific pick location (A0003) is split in multiple lines, because the system requires product from multiple sources (locations, SSCC’s, batches…) to assemble the required replenishment quantity to fulfill the order.

4. Identify source logistic unit or location

After selecting the replenishment order, scan the source SSCC. The bulk location and the source SSCC are displayed on the screen. Only the SSCC from the order can be scanned. If the scanned SSCC is a mono pallet with the exact same quantity as the quantity to replenish, the system automatically proceeds to the Scan destination location screen.
In case of there is no SSCC present, scan the pick location or select it from a list after pressing the ‘Select location’ button.

5. Identify product

If multiple items are stored on the logistic unit or bulk location, identify the product to move.

Scan the product or select it from a list after tapping the Select a product button. Every item that is stored on the logistic unit/bulk location is listed, but only the item to replenish can be scanned or selected.
If there is only one item on the SSCC/ location, the system automatically proceeds with that item.

6. Enter quantity

Enter the quantity. By default the quantity on the replenish order line will be displayed, but it is possible to proceed with another quantity. The maximum quantity depends on the quantity of the item on the SSCC/ location.

7. Scan destination location/SSCC

After having identified the products to move, scan the destination location or SSCC. To select the destination location from a list, tap the Select location button.
It is possible to move the products to a new logistic unit. Tap the New SSCC button and identify the destination location.

8. Logistic unit/item moved

After having confirmed the destination location, the system registers the move of the logistic units or items and goes back to the Select a replenish order screen.

When all replenish order lines are processed, the replenish order is closed.

12.4. Consolidated move

This move is used for executing put aways or ad-hoc moves in a group. The input of the consolidated move can be either a location or SSCC’s.

12.4.1. Initiate the flow

To initiate the flow, press the ‘Consolidated move’ button. The button can be reached via: Logistic > Move

12.4.2. Scan an SSCC or location

When using SSCC’s as an input, scan the SSCC’s to move. The already scanned SSCC’s will be displayed in a list. After scanning all the SSCCs, press the right arrow button to proceed. The items located on the logistic units will be displayed in a list.

When using a location as an input, scan the location or press the ‘Select location’ button and select a pick location from the list. The items located on that location will be displayed in a list.

12.4.3. Identify product

Press the ‘Move everything’ button to move all the products displayed in the list or select an item to identify the product to move.

When moving an item that has products with different batches on the selected location or SSCC, identify the product to move by selecting its batch from a list. On the next screen add the quantity. The entered quantity cannot exceed the quantity in stock on from the selected batch on the location.

To move every batch, press the ‘Move everything’ button.

When moving products that are stored on more than one logistic unit on the selected location, identify the products by selecting an SSCC from the list. On the next screen add the quantity. The entered quantity cannot exceed the item quantity on the logistic unit.

When there are products on the selected location without a logistic unit, instead of the ‘Move everything’ button an ‘Other tasks’ button will be displayed. After pressing this button two buttons will be displayed:

  • Move everything
  • No SSCC

To select the products without a logistic unit, press the ‘No SSCC’ button. On the next screen add the quantity. The entered quantity cannot exceed the quantity on stock.

12.4.4. Identify destination location/ SSCC

To move the selected products to an existing SSCC, scan the SSCC. If the scanned SSCC is not in stock, identify the destination location on the next screen. The products will be moved to that logistic unit and location. Then the system will go back to the ‘Scan source location or GS1 label’ screen.

To create a new logistic unit, press the ‘New SSCC’ button then identify the destination location.

To move the selected products without changing the logistic unit, simply scan or select a location from a list.

Please note: Products will be moved without a linked SSCC in the following cases:

  • When moving a partial pallet and the SSCC was not defined
  • When moving every pallet containing the selected item from the location and there is a mixed pallet containing other items among the pallets to move

Scan the destination location or select it from a list after pressing the ‘Select other location’ button. When the location suggestion option is not enabled to the warehouse, the system will display an additional ‘Select empty location’ button. To execute the move to an empty location, press this button and select a location from the list.

When the location suggestion is enabled for the warehouse, the Default location is the first suggested location calculated based on the logic described in Location suggestions.

When the location suggestion is not enabled for the warehouse, the Default location is the standard location set for the given warehouse on the Produmex Inventory tab of the Item Master Data of the item. If the items to move have different standard location set for the warehouse, no default location is displayed.

When creating a new SSCC the ’Warehouse: a new LUI has been created (700)’ print event will be triggered and the logistic label will be printed after the destination location had been selected.

12.4.5. Logistic unit/Items are moved

After identifying the destination location, the movement is registered and the system displays the message: Logistic unit/Items are moved. The movement will be booked as a ‘Move’.

When there are still items to move, the system goes back to the ‘Select a product’ screen. When everything was moved from the location or the selected logistic units, the system displays the message ‘No more items to move’ then goes back to the ‘Scan SSCC or location’ screen.

Receive from WHS Flow

Overview

The Receive from WHS Flow is used to move stock from a warehouse that is not managed by Produmex to a warehouse that is managed by Produmex.

When moving the stock between warehouses the use of the Inventory Transfer Request document is optional.

Configuration

1. The flow uses a transit warehouse not managed by Produmex as the source warehouse. Adjust the settings of the source warehouse on the User Defined Fields of the Warehouses-Setup screen.

Set up source WHS

2. Create the warehouse in the Organizational Structure.

3. Create at least one dock within the warehouse.

Organizational Structure

Workflow

Receive from WHS Flow steps

1. Start the flow

There are two options to start the flow on the Mobile Client.

  • Logistics > Move > Receive from WHS Receive from WHS
  • Purchase > Receive from WHS Receive from WHS
2. Select a dock

On the Select a location screen select the receiving dock from the list of the available locations or enter the code of the dock. Press the right arrow key to proceed.

Select a dock

3. Select an inventory transfer request

On the Select an order screen select the inventory transfer request from the list of the orders or enter the number of the inventory transfer request. Press the right arrow key to proceed with scanning a barcode.

If you want to continue the flow without selecting an Inventory Transfer Request, tap the No Order button.

Select an order

If you tap the No Order button, the system displays the Select a source warehouse screen.

Select a source warehouse

4. Scan the GS1 barcode(s)

Scan the barcode(s) on the logistic unit and tap the Done button.

All the information from the GS1 barcodes is saved into the memory and the system does not ask additional questions about the scanned information.

If there is no label on the logistic unit, tap the No label on the logistic unit button.

Scan the GS1 barcode(s)

5. Identify identical logistic units

If there is no SSCC barcode among the scanned barcodes, or there is no label on the logistic unit, the system asks if there are identical logistic units.

If there are identical logistic units, tap button Identical logistic units button.

The system asks the quantity of the identical logistic units. Enter the number of the logistic units. The number of the logistic units is not limited. Tap the right arrow key to proceed.

If there is no identical logistic unit, tap the No identical logistic units button.

Identify identical logistic units

6. Identify product

Scan the barcode or tap the Select a product button.

Select the product from the list.

Identify product

7. Enter batch data

If the batch number was not scanned previously, select it from the list. At this step, new batch numbers cannot be added to the system. Only batches available in the source warehouse can be selected.

Based on the item settings, additional data can be entered to the batch, e.g. Best Before Date, second batch number, batch attributes, etc.

Enter batch data

8. Enter quantity

Enter the item quantity or scan the serial numbers. The entered quantity cannot exceed the open quantity defined in the inventory transfer request.

When an item has a serial number, the system automatically offers the scanning option.

Based on the settings of the catch weight function, the system might ask for entering the weight as well.

After entering the quantity, the system prints the item label(s) depending on the item settings.

Enter quantity

9. Add more products from the logistic unit

After entering the quantity, the system asks whether there are other products on the logistic unit that are not scanned.

If there are other products on the logistic unit, tap Yes. Go back to the Identify product step to identify the products on the logistic unit.

Tap the Receive items button to finish the process. When you tap the Receive items button, the system books the inventory transfer.

Add product

If there is no other product on the logistic unit, tap No and the system registers the item. The data of the registered items is stored in ASN tables.

As the data of the registered items is stored in the system, it is possible to continue the flow after it was stopped without booking the items.

If there was no SSCC barcode among the scanned barcodes, or there was no label on the logistic unit, the system generates an SSCC barcode. The system also triggers the Warehouse: a new LU has been created (700) print event and prints the logistic label. The default report for this print event is the DefaultLogisticsLabel.rpt.

If the Move all items in 1 stock transfer? option is disabled on the Receive from WHS controller, the Inventory Transfer document is created and the system returns to the Select an inventory transfer request screen.

If the option is enabled, the system goes back to the Scan the GS1 barcode screen. On this screen an additional Receive items button is displayed. The Inventory Transfer document is created after you tap the Receive items button.

Scan barcode

10. Finish process

To continue the flow on a next logistic unit go back to the Scan the GS1 barcode(s) step. Tap the Receive items button to finish the process.

When you tap the Receive items button, the system books the inventory transfer. The system also triggers the Warehouse: move has been added (701) print event and prints the delivery document.

After booking the items, the system goes back to the Select an order screen, and the flow can be continued with another inventory transfer request.

11. Continue the flow

When quitting after the item registration, the system offers the option to book receipt. Despite not booking the receipt, the flow can be continued after the registration step, because the system stores the data of the registered items in ASN tables.

Registered items

If there are registered items in the system that were not booked, after the Select an inventory transfer request step the system asks whether you want to remove the registered items.

When you tap the Remove registered items button, the system removes the registered items and the flow continues with the Scan the GS1 barcode(s) step. When tapping the right arrow key, the flow proceeds with the registered items.

13. Proof of delivery

While the functionality of exporting and importing the EPOD files described in this documentation is still valid, Boyum IT no longer sells or provides the EPOD solution. It is the responsibility of the user to make sure that the export/import files are converted with the user's own EPOD solution.

13.1. Prerequisites

13.1.1. Settings

Adjust the settings of the proof of delivery on the 5.1.3.63. Proof of delivery controller.

13.1.2. Adjust the Notification Listener

Make sure that the Notification Listener is installed. For more information about the installation of the Notification Listener see: 3.2.4. Produmex SB1 Notification listener, 3.3.3. Enable the Notification Listener stored procedure.

Update the configuration file of the Notification Listener. The file is located in the installation folder of the Produmex SB1 Notification Listener, for example: C:\Program Files\Produmex\Produmex SB1 Notification Listener\

The configuration file is called ‘Produmex.Foundation.SboNotification.ServiceHost.exe.config’.

Open the file with a text editor (e.g. Notepad).

Locate the line below and uncomment it:

 <action senderType="P" objectType="POD_RTHE" transactionType="U" logic="Produmex.Sbo.Logex.SboNotification.Actions.Interfacing.NotificationQueue, Produmex.Sbo.Logex.SboNotification.Actions"/> 

To create the export files for the proof of delivery solution, enable the Notification Listener procedure.

  • To run the Notification Listener in the background, start it from Windows\Control Panel\ Programs and Features\.
  • To run the Notification Listener with an open console, launch the RunConsole.bat file from the installation folder of the Produmex SB1 Notification Listener, for example: C:\Program Files\Produmex\Produmex SB1 Notification Listener\.

13.2. Perform delivery

13.2.1. Create a new route

When creating a route where a proof of delivery is needed, set the Route for ‘Proof of delivery’? option to true on the Create new route screen.

It is also possible to modify this setting on the Route detail window.

13.2.2. Export file

Perform the delivery on the fat client. Collect the stock based on the pick list, pack the goods then start the shipping. After every logistic unit has been loaded, the system displays the ‘Adding sales delivery notes in SAP. Can take some seconds… ‘ message regardless of using the proof for deliver function or not.

When the Route for ‘Proof of delivery’? option is enabled for the route, the system does not create a sales delivery note until the delivery is confirmed. By the help of the Notification Listener an export file is created for the proof of delivery solution. A separate file will be generated for each route.

The export file will be created to the ’Interface monitor output path’ defined on the Config tab on the company level of the Organizational Structure.

Export file naming convention: PMX_EPOD_Route_routekey_timestamp.csv

The file contains information about the customer, address and goods delivered.

When the export file was not created, first check if the Notification Listener is running.

After the shipping, the status of the route will be changed to ‘POD pending’. The pick list will remain open with the status ‘Packed’.

In the inventory record the stock to deliver will remain on the shipping dock. The stock will be locked for the pick list until the delivery has been confirmed.

The proof of delivery solution takes the output files as an input.

13.2.3. Import file

After the delivery has been confirmed, the proof of delivery solution creates an import file with the confirmation data. A separate file will be generated for each delivery address.

After the synchronization, the file will be imported to the folder defined with the ‘Interface monitor input path’ on the Config tab on the company level of the Organizational Structure.

The signature images and the captured pictures from the delivery solution will be imported to the folder defined in the 5.1.3.63. Proof of delivery controller

Import file naming convention: EPOD_PMX_EPOD_Route_routekey_jobsequencenumber_timestamp.csv

The file contains information about the route, the goods delivered and the failed deliveries. Start the Interfacing tool with the /t:POD /d:import /rf parameters.

With the help of the Interfacing tool, Produmex imports the file from the proof of delivery solution and creates the sales delivery note. The delivery note only contains the SSCC’s or quantities confirmed with the proof of delivery solution. On the ‘Attachments’ tab links to the signature and other images are inserted.

Based on the import file, the system closes the confirmed pick list lines and generates the sales delivery note. Pick lists linked to a failed delivery will remain open. The system unlinks those open pick lists from the route, and closes the route.

After the Interfacing tool processed the import file, it is moved to the archive or the error folder defined on the Config tab on the company level of the Organizational Structure.

14. Quality types

Produmex offers the functionality of measuring the quality of the goods during the following processes:

  • Reception
    • Document type = 20
  • Bulk reception
    • Document type = 20
  • Production
    • Document type = 202
  • Production receipt
    • Document type = 202
  • Disassembly
    • Document type = 202

Define quality types and valid values

First define the quality types on the Produmex Quality Types UDF. Open the table via: Tool > Default Forms > PMX_QUTY Produmex quality types. For more information see: 3.2.3.33. Quality types

Set the valid values for quality types with the convertor type „List” on the Produmex quality valid values UDF. Open the table via: Tool > Default Forms > PMX_QUVV Produmex quality valid values. For more information see: 3.2.3.34. Quality type valid values

Perform the reception

Perform the reception on your terminal. Based on the value set as ‘Moment of capture’ on the Produmex quality types UDF, the system will ask the quality type in the beginning or in the end of the reception.
The input screen type will vary based on the convertor type.

Int. and Double List
“Int. and Double” “List”
String Date
“String"“Date”

Access the data

The data can be accessed by using the following query:

SELECT OPDN."Docnum", OPDN."CardCode", OPDN."CardName", "@PMX_QUTY"."Name", "PMX_QUVA"."QualityValue"
FROM OPDN
LEFT OUTER JOIN PMX_QUVA ON OPDN."DocEntry" = PMX_QUVA."BaseEntry" AND OPDN."ObjType" = PMX_QUVA."BaseType"
INNER JOIN "@PMX_QUTY" ON PMX_QUVA."QualityTypeCode" = "@PMX_QUTY"."Code"

15. Production

Production manager screens

Production zone

This screen provides an overview of the running production orders and the inventory in the available lined up locations.

Overview production

Production line
This is the name of the production line. Only active production lines are listed.
When the ‘Only 1 started production order allowed’ option is not flagged for the Production line, it is possible to start more than one production order on the line. Every started production order is displayed in a separate row.

Production order number
This is the number of the production order. Production orders with ‘Started’ status assigned to the production line are displayed.

Item code
The code of the item to produce.

Description
The description of the item to produce.

#done
The quantity that is already produced.

#to do
The quantity that still has to be produced. It is calculated by: {Planned quantity – Done quantity}.

#planned
The planned quantity in the production order.

Status
The status of the production line. The status can be ‘Started’, if there is a started production on the line or ‘Free’, if there is no started production on the line.

Tank details

Tank
The name of the silo/ tank. Every lined up silo/ tank location is listed.

Item code
The code of the item stored in the silo/tank.

Description
The description of the item stored in the silo/tank.

Batch
The batch number of the item stored in the silo/tank.

# in tank
The available quantity of the item in the tank.

Production line
The code of the production line where the silo/tank is in use.

Press the ‘Refresh’ button to refresh the screen.
Press the ‘Close’ button to close the screen.
Press the ‘Detail’ button to open the ‘Production detail’ window for the selected production order.
Press the ‘production orders’ button to open the ‘Production order’ window.

Production order

On this screen production orders can be released and started.

Select the production line from the dropdown menu.
Production orders without an assigned production line and production orders that are assigned to the selected production line are listed on the screen.

Production n°
The number of the production order.

Date
The due date of the production.

Item code
The code of the item to produce.

Description
The description of the item to produce.

Quantity
The planned quantity in the production order.

Status
The Produmex status of the production order. Possible values: Planned, On hold, Released, Started.

Production line
The assigned production line of the order.
When the production order has no assigned production line, this field is empty. When the selected production line is assigned to the production order, the value is the code of the production line. Production orders assigned to another production line are not displayed on the list.

Press the ‘Release order’ button to release the production order. Only ‘Planned’ production orders can be released.
Press the ‘Start production order’ button to open the Start production screen. Only ‘Released’ production orders can be started.
Press the ‘Production line details’ button to open the Production detail screen. The button is only active if the status of the selected production order is ‘Started’.
Press the ‘Close’ button to close the screen and go back to the Production zone screen.

Start production

On this screen the production order can be started. It is also possible to assign the lined up location for lined up components and to modify the batch number and best before date, depending on the item details and the production settings.

Production order
The number of the production order.

Item
The code and description of the item to produce.

Quantity to make
The planned quantity in the production order.

Batch number
Batch number of the product to produce. This field is only displayed when the item has batch numbers.

Batch number 2
Batch number of the product to produce. This field is only displayed when the item has second batch numbers.
Adjust the batch number settings on the 5.1.3.4. Batchnumber production company.

Best before date
Best before date of the product to produce. This field is only displayed if the item has a best before date. Adjust the best before date settings in the 3.2.3.29. Expiry definition UDT and the 5.1.3.6. Best before for production generator.

Lined up tanks

Item code
The item code of the component that has to be lined up.

Description
The item description of the component that has to be lined up.

Tank
The tank assigned to the component.

Tanks

Tank
List of lined up locations added to the production line. For more information about the production line settings see: 5.2.3. Production line settings.

#in tank
The available quantity of the selected item in the tank.

Produce?
Displays whether the ‘Produce ingredients’ option is enabled or not for the lined up location on the production line. For more information about the settings for the added lined up locations see: 5.2.3. Production line settings.

To assign a tank for the selected component, select a tank and press the ‘Assign tank’ button.
Press the ‘Start production’ button to start the production.
Press the ‘Close’ button to close the screen and go back to the Production order screen.

Production detail

On this screen the production can be finished. Produced and theoretical consumed quantities are displayed.

Header

See: start production

Finished product

Quantity made
The produced quantity.

Quantity still to make
The quantity that still has to be produced.

Ingredients (not lined up)

Item code
The item code of the component. Every not lined up component from the production order are listed here.

Description
The item description of the component.

#to pick
The quantity that still needs to be picked.

#on input
The available quantity of the component on the input location of the production line.

#on line
The available quantity of the component on the production line.

#used
The consumed quantity.

Ingredients (lined up)

Item code
The item code of the component that has to be lined up. Every lined up component from the production order is listed here.

Description
The item description of the component.

#still needed
The quantity that still has to be consumed for the production.

#used
The consumed quantity.

#in tank
The available quantity of the component in the tank.

Tank
The lined up location assigned for the component. It is possible to change the tank: press the ‘Change tank’ button.

Tanks

Tank
List of lined up locations added to the production line. For more information about the production line settings see: 5.2.3. Production line settings.

#in tank
The stock of the selected item available on the lined up location.

Press the ‘Refresh’ button the refresh the screen.
Press the ‘Finish production’ to open the Stop production screen.
Press the ‘Close’ button to close the screen and go back to the Production order screen.

Stop production

On this screen the material consumption can be confirmed and the production order(s) can be closed.

Stop production - production manager type: SPL_CONS_LOCK

When finishing a production order linked to a production line where the SPL_CONS_LOCK option is set as the production manager type, the following screen opens:
On this screen only one production order can be closed.

Header

See: start production

Ingredients (lined up)

Item code
The item code of the component that has to be lined up. Every component from the production order that has to be lined up is listed here. Different batches are displayed in separate lines.

Description
The item description of the component.

Batch 1- Batch 2 – BBD – SSCC
The batch details of the component in analogical order.

#on line
The available quantity of the item on the production line.

#used
The consumed quantity.

weight used
The consumed weight. (In case of catch weight items.)

#remaining
The quantity remaining on the production line. It is calculated from the #on line and the #used quantity.

weight remaining
The weight remaining on the production line.

Serial numbers
Click on this field to add the serial numbers of the used products.

Ingredients (lined up)

Item code
The item code of the component that has to be lined up. Every component from the production order that has to be lined up is listed here.
If the ‘Direct consumption of goods’ option is flagged for the silo/tank, the products stored on that location will not be displayed.

Description
The item description of the component.

#used
The consumed quantity.

weight used
The consumed weight.

#remaining
The quantity remaining in the lined up location.

Tank
The lined up location assigned to the component.

Press the ‘Stop’ production screen to close the production order.
Press the ‘Close’ button to close the screen and go back to the Production detail screen.

Stop production - production manager type: MPL_CONS_INPUT

When finishing a production order linked to a production line where the MPL_CONS_INPUT option is set as the production manager type, the following screen opens:
On this screen multiple production orders assigned to different production lines can be closed.

Active production orders

Production line
The code of the production line. A production line is listed if:

  • has the same input location
  • there is a started production order

Production order number
This is the number of the production order. Production orders with ‘Started’ status assigned to the production line are displayed.

Item code
The code of the item to produce.

# done
The quantity that is already produced.

# planned
The planned quantity in the production order.

Ingredients (not lined up)

Item code
The item code of the component. Every not lined up component from the selected production order are listed here.

Description
The item description of the component.

#theoretical
The theoretical quantity is calculated by: {Produced quantity*Base quantity of the component}.

#used
The used quantity is calculated by: {(component’s theoretical quantity for the production order/ ? theoretical quantity of the component)*quantity on the input location}.

EXAMPLE:

Production line A
Produced quantity: 1

Item code Base Qty #Theoretical Qty on input location #Used
Component 0122124
Component 021155

Production line B
Produced quantity: 2

Item code Base Qty #Theoretical Qty on input location #Used
Component 0124126

Weight used
The consumed weight.

Ingredients (lined up)

Item code The item code of the component that has to be lined up. Each lined up component from the listed production orders are listed. Different batches are displayed in separate lines. If the ‘Direct consumption of goods’ option is flagged for the silo/tank, the products stored on that location will not be displayed.

Description
The item description of the component.

#theoretical
The theoretical quantity is calculated by: {Produced quantity*Base quantity of the component}.

# used
The consumed quantity.

Weight used
The consumed weight.

# remaining
The quantity remaining in the lined up location.

Location
The lined up location assigned to the component.

Press the ‘Stop production’ button to close every listed production order.
Press the ‘Close’ button to close the screen and go back to the Production detail screen.

Production Guide

The process chain of the production consists the following steps:

  1. creating a production order
  2. releasing the production order
  3. picking for the production
  4. starting the production
  5. moving the components to the production line
  6. producing
  7. finishing the production

Production overview

1. Configuration settings for the production

Before starting the production process, adjust the following configuration settings:

1.1. Quality status
Define the default status for the produced items. At the company level of the Organizational Structure go to the Production tab. Select the quality status from the dropdown menu. For more information about the quality status see: 5.1.9. Quality status

1.2. Production line settings
Adjust the settings of the production lines. For more information about the production line settings see: 5.2.3. Production line settings

1.3. Production controller
Customize the settings of the production in the production controller. For more information about the production controller see: 5.1.3.48. Production controller

1.4. Picking for production
Customize the settings of the picking in the Picking for production controller. For more information about the controller see: 5.1.3.47. Picking for production controller

1.5. Batch number of the product
When producing items managed by batches, specify the settings of the batch number.
On the Batchnumber production company controller, select an extension to define the batch number format. Adjust the batch number settings on the controller. For more information about the batch number controller see: 5.1.3.4. Batchnumber production company

1.6. Best before date for the product
The best before date settings can be specified for items with best before dates.
Adjust the calculation formula of the best before date on the 3.2.3.29. Expiry definition UDT. Link the expiry definition to the item in the Produmex Production tab on the 3.1. Produmex Production Tab.
Adjust the settings of the best before date modification on the Best before for production generator. For more information about the generator see: 5.1.3.6. Best before for production generator

1.7. Item settings
Adjust the settings of the product and the materials in the Produmex Production tab of the Item Master Data. For more information see: 3.1.3. Produmex Item Master Data Tabs

1.8. Scale configuration
It is possible to integrate a scale to the production process. For more information see:8. How to setup/ integrate a scale with Produmex

2. Create a production order

Create a production order in SAP B1. For more information about the Produmex extensions on the ’Bill of Materials’ and ’Production Order’ screens see: 3.3. Production When a production order is created, both the SAP and Produmex status of the order is ‘Planned’.

3. Release the production order

Production orders can be released in the office environment only. The order release can be performed on the production order or on the production manager.

3.1. Production order
3.1.1. Assign the production line on the production order

Please note that the production line can only be assigned or changed on the production order if the SAP status of the order is ‘Planned’.

Select a production line from the dropdown menu next to the ‘Warehouse’ field. Only the active production lines located in the product’s warehouse are listed.

3.1.2. Release the order

Change the SAP status of the order from ‘Planned’ to ‘Released’ then press the ‘Update’ button. The Produmex status of the order will remain ‘Planned’ until the production is started. As long as the Produmex status is ‘Planned’, the SAP status of a released order can be changed to ‘Planned’ or to ‘Closed’.

3.2. Production manager

Open the ‘Production manager’ from the Produmex Production menu. For more information about the Production manager screens see: Production manager screens

Press the ‘Production orders’ button to open the ‘Production order’ screen.
On the Production order screen select the production line from the dropdown menu.

Select a production order from the list. The following production orders will be listed:

  • Production orders without an assigned production line. These production orders will be listed under every production line. The ‘Production line’ field is empty.
  • Production orders assigned to the selected production line.

To release the order click on the ‘Release order’ button. The status of the order will be changed from ‘Planned’ to ‘Released’. The ‘Release order’ button is only active when the status of the selected line is ‘Planned’.
After a production order without an assigned production line has been released, the production still can be started at any free production line.

4. Start the production order

Production orders can be started in the office environment or on the shopfloor.
When using the ‘Receipt from Production’ flow, it is possible to start multiple production orders on one production line, except if the ‘Only 1 started production order allowed’ option is set to true for the production line. For more information see: 5.2.3. Production line settings
When using the ‘Production’ flow, only one started production order is allowed on the production line.

4.1. Office

In the office environment the production order can be started on the production order or on the Production Manager.

Production order
Click on the ’Start’ button to start the production order. The button is only active is the following verifies:

  • The status of the production order is released.
  • The production order has an assigned production line.

A ‘Start production’ window will open up. Click on the ’Cancel’ button to close the form.

Production manager
Open the Production Manager and click on the ’Production orders’ button. Select the production line from the dropdown menu. Select the production order and click on the ‘Start production order’ button. The button is only active when the status of the selected order is ‘Released’.

A ‘Start production’ window will open up. To go back to the previous screen, click on ‘Cancel’.

4.1.1. Assign a tank

When there is a component that has to be lined up, assign a tank to the component on the ‘Start production’ screen before starting the production order.
Select a component from the ‘Lined up tanks’ section. Then select a location listed under ‘Tanks’. Only locations that verify for the following are listed:

  • the location is lined up
  • the location is added to the production line as a lined up location
  • there is stock of the component available on the location

Press the ‘Assign tank’ button. After a lined up location has been assigned to the component, the code of the location is displayed in the ‘Tank’ field.
When the ‘Auto line up selection’ option is enabled on the Item Master Data of the component, the system will automatically line up the location for the component.

4.1.2. Batch number and best before date

When the produced item is managed by batches and/or has a best before date, based on the settings, the batch number and the best before date can be changed on this screen. For more information about the batch number and best before date settings for production see: 1.5. Batch number of the product, 1.6. Best before date for the product. Enter the batch number(s) and/or select the best before date from the calendar.

4.1.3. Start the production order

After the lined up locations have been assigned and the batch number(s) and best before date have been defined, click on the ‘Start production’ button to start the production.
After the production order has been started, the status will be changed from ‘Released’ to ‘Started’ and the order will be assigned to the production line where it was started. On the production order the Produmex order will be changed to ‘Started’. The SAP status will remain ‘Released’.
The ‘Production line details’ button is only active when a production order with the status ‘Started’ is selected. It opens up the ‘Production details’ screen.

4.1.4. Change tank

It is possible to change the assigned lined up location after the production has been started. On the ‘Production detail’ screen select a component from ‘Ingredients (lined up)’ list. Then select a lined up location from the ‘Tanks’ list. Click on the ‘Change tank’ button. This button is only active if the selected lined up location is not assigned to the component.
A ‘Production – swap tank’ window will open up.
Add the quantity or weight remaining in the previous tank to the respective field.

4.2. Shopfloor

Production orders can be started also on the shopfloor. When using the default settings, the production order can be started only in the ‘Production’, Disassembly’ and ‘Disassembly – weight’ flows. When the ‘Allow starting production order on production receipt flow?’ option is enabled on the Production controller, the production order can be started also in the ‘Receipt from Production’ flow.

For the detailed description about starting production orders on the shopfloor see:

5. Production picking

In the picking step collect the needed components for the production. Based on the Production line settings, the destination of the picking can be the input location or the pick to location.

Produmex offers two flows for picking the components of a production. The ‘Picking for production’ flows uses the production order as an input. Because the picking is performed without a picklist, the stock to be picked is not locked in the inventory. The picked quantity can exceed the planned quantity in the production order.

The ‘Picklist for production’ flow uses a pick list generated from the production order as an input. The system will lock the stock when creating the proposal and the pick list. Pick lists can only be generated from a production order when the ‘Create proposal for picking’ option is set to true in the Picking for production controller. The picked quantity cannot exceed the proposed quantity in the pick list.

5.1. Picking for production

Picking for production

Press the ‘Picking for production’ button. On the next screen select a task.
Press the ‘Normal picking for production’ button to pick for the production.
Press the ‘Unpick’ button to remove previously picked stock from the pick/input location.

When the ‘Allow continuous picking for production’ option is enabled on the Picking for production controller, an additional ’Continuous picking for production’ button is displayed on the screen. When performing the picking with this flow, the system will allow to pick production order lines whose full quantity has been picked.

Picking for production flow

Normal picking for productionSelect moveable locationSelect a product to pickSelect alternate stockIdentify SSCC/ pick locationIdentify SSCC/ pick locationIdentify SSCC/ pick locationIdentify productSelect destination location
5.1.1. Normal picking for production
5.1.1.1. Select production order

Select a production order to pick from the list. Only production orders with an assigned production line and ‘Released’ or ‘Started’ status are displayed in the list. Proceed with the right arrow button. The following information is shown on the list:

Select production order

  1. The production order number. Started production orders are indicated with an icon.
  2. The order type. It is possible to pick for ‘Standard’, ‘Special’ and ‘Disassembly’ type of production orders too with this flow. ‘Standard’ and ‘Special’ production orders are indicated with an icon and ‘Disassembly’ production orders are indicated with an icon.
  3. The code, description and barcode of the item to produce.
  4. The destination location of the picking. Depending on the Production line settings, the input or the pick to location of the production line is assigned to the production order.
  5. The due date of the production order.
  6. The batch number of the product.
5.1.1.2. Select moveable location

Press the ‘No moveable location’ button or select a moveable location from a list to move the picked items with a moveable location. The steps for picking with or without a moveable location are identical except for the cancellation. When picking onto a moveable location, the list of the already picked items cannot be cleared. Select moveable location

5.1.1.3. Select a product to pick

Select a product to pick

Select a production order line to pick from the list. Proceed with the right arrow button. The following information is shown on the list:

  1. The code, description and barcode of the item to pick.
  2. The quantity that still needs to be picked. It is calculated by: {Already picked quantity - Planned quantity}. When picking with the ‘Normal picking for production’ flow, the production order lines whose full quantity has been picked are not displayed on the list. When picking with the ’Continuous picking for production’ flow, those order lines are displayed too.
  3. The available quantity on the input location of the assigned production line.
  4. Optional components are indicated with an icon.
  5. Lined up and time registry components are not listed.
5.1.1.4. Identify SSCC/ pick location

Identify the SSCC or location to pick from. The system sorts the proposed stock based on the option selected as ‘Picking order by’ in the Picking for production controller. The details of the first proposed stock will be displayed on the bottom of the screen.
When the proposed stock to pick has a linked SSCC, the ‘Scan an SSCC’ screen is displayed. On the bottom of the screen the pick location and the SSCC is shown. Scan the SSCC.
In case of the scanned SSCC was linked to a single item or batch pallet, the system asks whether to move the full pallet or not. Press the ‘Yes’ button to move the full logistic unit. Press ‘No’ to move only a partial unit.
To pick only a partial pallet, press the ‘Pick partial logistic unit’ button. On the next screen scan the SSCC. When moving only a partial logistic unit, identify the products to move.

Identify SSCC

When the proposed stock to pick has no linked SSCC, identify the pick location. Scan the location or select it from the list after pressing the ‘Select location’ button. Only the location that is displayed on the bottom of the screen can be scanned or selected.

Identify pick location

5.1.1.5. Select alternate stock

Select alternate stock To pick from another SSCC or location, press the ‘Alternate stock’ button and select a production line from the list and proceed with the right arrow button. The following information is shown on the list:

  1. Pick location
  2. Quantity to pick
  3. Code, description, barcode of the item to pick
  4. Batch number
  5. Best before date
  6. SSCC

On the next screen scan the SSCC or the pick location.

5.1.1.6. Identify product

Identify the product to pick. In case a full logistic unit is moved, the system automatically skips the following screens.
Scan the product or select it from a list after pressing the ‘Select a product’ button. Only items stored on the selected logistic unit or pick location are displayed on the list.

Identify product

Select the batch from the list. The following information is shown on the list:

  1. Batch number
  2. Second batch number
  3. Best before date
  4. Quality status

When there is only one batch on the location or the logistic unit for the item, then the system automatically proceeds with that batch.

Enter the quantity to pick. The picked quantity can exceed the quantity in the production order, but is limited by the available quantity on the logistic unit or pick location. For more information about quantity entering methods see: 4.3.4. Screens for entering additional information

5.1.1.7. Select destination location

After the product has been identified, scan the destination location or select it after pressing the ‘Select location’ button. Only the default location can be selected as the destination location. The default location is the input location of the production line. When a pick to location is set for the production line, it is the default location.
To continue the picking, press the ‘Continue picking’ button. The system will go back to the ‘Select product to pick’ screen. The button is only displayed when there are still components to pick.
When all the components have been picked, and the destination location has been identified, the system shows the ‘There are no more items to pick’ message.
After the picked items have been moved to the destination location, the system generates a ‘Move’ document in the Produmex office module to register the movement.
When the Picking for production: (After picking 401) print event is set in the Organizational Structure, the system asks whether to print the picklist for production. Press the ‘Yes’ button to print the pick list.

Select destination location

5.1.1.8. Cancellation

To cancel the picking, press the left arrow button. When nothing was picked, the system will go back to the ‘Select a task’ screen.
In case of picking onto a moveable location, the system will ask for identifying the destination location for the already picked products.
In case of picking without a moveable location, the system will ask for confirmation. To cancel the process, press ‘Yes’. The list of the picked items will be cleared. To proceed with the already picked items press ‘No’.

Cancellation

5.1.1. Unpick
5.1.2.1. Select a production order

Select a production order from the list. Every production order with at least one picked component is displayed in the list, regardless of the flow the picking was performed.

Select a production order

5.1.2.2. Identify SSCC

Scan the SSCC. To select the SSCC from a list, press the ‘No SSCC’ button. Only SSCC’s stored on the pick location of the assigned production line can be scanned or selected.
When there is no SSCC present, press the ‘No SSCC’ button. On the next screen press again the ‘No SSCC’ button.

Identify SSCC

After an SSCC was identified, scan the GS1 label or press the ’Done’ button to proceed with the unpicking.

5.1.2.3. Identify product

When unpicking only a partial logistic unit, identify the product. Scan the product or select it from a list after pressing the ‘Select a product’ button. Every item that can be found on the pick to or input location will be listed, but only items linked to the production order can be scanned or selected.
When the item is managed by batches and there are more than one batch on the logistic unit or pick location, select the batch as well.

Identify product

After a product has been identified, the system goes back to the ‘Scan an SSCC’ screen. An extra ‘Book move’ button is displayed. Press this button to finish the unpicking.

Identify product

5.1.2.4. Identify destination location

Identify destination location After the ‘Book move’ button was pressed, identify the destination location.

A default location is displayed on the screen.

When the location suggestion is enabled for the warehouse, the Default location is the first suggested location calculated based on the logic described in Location suggestions.

When the location suggestion is not enabled for the warehouse, the Default location is the standard location set for the given warehouse on the Produmex Inventory tab of the Item Master Data of the item. If the items to move have different standard location set for the warehouse, no default location is displayed.

Scan an SSCC to unpick the product to that SSCC. If the scanned SSCC is not in stock, identify the destination location on the next screen.

Scan a location to unpick the products to that location or press the ‘Select other location’ to select it from a list.

Press the ‘New SSCC’ button to unpick to a new SSCC. On the next screen scan a location or select it from a list after pressing the ‘Select other location’ button.

After the unpicked items have been moved to the selected location, the system generates a ‘Move’ document in the Produmex office module to register the movement.

After a component was unpicked, it can be picked again with the ‘Normal picking for production’ flow.

5.1.2.5. Cancellation

To cancel the unpicking, press the left arrow button. When there are already unpicked products the system will ask whether to process with the unpick or not. Press the ‘Process unpick’ button to book the unpick. Press the ‘Cancel unpick’ button to clear the list of unpicked products.

Cancellation

5.2. Picklist for production
5.2.1. Office

Before picking with the Picklist for production flow, create a pick list in the office environment.
On the production order click on the ‘Create pick list proposal’ button. The button is only displayed if the ‘Create proposal for picking’ option is set to true in the Picking for production controller. A pick list proposal will be generated and the stock to be picked will be locked. It is only possible to create a pick list proposal for a production order with an assigned production line.
It is also possible to create pick lists for production via the Pick list proposal manager.
Then click on the ‘Gen. pick list’ button on the pick list proposal window to create the pick list. It is only possible to generate a pick list for released production orders.

Production picking flow

Pick list for productionSelect a pick listSelect an itemIdentify moveable locationIdentify the SSCC or pick locationSelect batchOther tasksEnter quantityPicked pallet
5.2.2. Shopfloor
5.2.2.1. Initiate the flow

To initiate the flow, press the ‘Pick list for production’ button on the scanner.

5.2.2.2. Select a pick list

Select a pick list from the list. Only active pick lists for a production order will be displayed. The following information is shown on the list:

  1. Production order number
  2. Destination location of the picking. Depending on the settings of the production line, the destination location is the input location or the pick to location of the production line.

Select a pick list

5.2.2.3. Select an item

Select a pick list line to pick. Press the right arrow button to proceed.

Select an item

5.2.2.4. Identify moveable location

Press the ‘No moveable location’ button to pick the components directly to the destination location. During this flow it is not recommended to pick onto a moveable location.

5.2.2.5. Identify the SSCC or pick location

Scan the SSCC or the pick location. To select the pick location from a list, press the ‘Select location’ button.

  1. Pick location
  2. Quantity to pick from the item
  3. Item to pick
  4. Storage logistic unit
  5. Total quantity of the pick list

Identify the SSCC or pick location

5.2.2.6. Select batch

When the item is managed by batches and there are more than one batch on the logistic unit or pick location, select the batch as well. Only the batch defined in the pick list can be selected.

Select batch

5.2.2.7. Other tasks

Press the ‘Other task’ button to reach the following tasks:

  • Alternate stock
  • Skip item

Press the ‘Alternate stock’ button to select alternate stock. On the next screen select the alternate stock from the list. After the alternate stock has been selected, identify it as described above.
Press the ‘Skip item’ button to skip the item. The system will go back to the ‘Items still to pick’ screen. (5.2.2.3.)

Other tasks

5.2.2.8. Enter quantity

After the SSCC or pick location was identified, enter the quantity to pick. The picked quantity cannot exceed the quantity in the pick list.

5.2.2.9. Picked pallet

After the quantity has been added, the locking is removed for the product. The product is moved to the destination location. The movement is registered in the Produmex office module in a ‘Move’ document. Proceed with the next line of the pick list. After every component has been picked, the system displays information about the picked pallet.

  1. Name of the production line
  2. SSCC of the new logistic unit

Note:

  • NEW If the full quantity of the selected item is picked and the 204 - Picking: after item is picked print event is set for the pick list type on the Print Events tab of the Organizational Structure, the system asks if you want to print a label. To proceed with the printing click OK.
  • When the ‘Picking for production: new LU full event (201)’ print event is set in the Organizational Structure, the print event is triggered and the logistic label is printed. The default report for this print event is the DefaultLogisticsLabel.rpt.

Picked pallet

6. Component weighing production

When the ‘Prod. Order start condition’ is set to ‘Component weighed’ for a component in the Bill of Materials , weigh the component before moving it to the production line.
Please note: This step is only for items where the weight is the primary uom.

Products picked to the Pick to location of the production line can be weighed. When the production line has no pick to location set, the components picked to the input location can be weighted.

Component weighing production flow

6.1. Initiate the flow

Press the ’Component weighing production’ button on the touchscreen.

Initiate the flow

6.2. Select a production line

Select a production line from the list. Only active production lines will be listed.

Select a production line

6.3. Select a production order

Select a production order from the list. Only released production orders that are not assigned to another production line will be displayed on the list. When there is a started production order on the production line, the system will proceed with that order automatically.
The following information is displayed on the list:

  1. Type of the production order indicated with an icon. Please note that Disassembly type production orders are not supported in this flow.
  2. Code, description and barcode of the item to produce.
  3. Number and due date of the production order.

Select a production order

6.4. Select item to weigh

On the next screen every not lined up material from the production order will be listed.
Different batches will be displayed in separate lines.
The available quantity is the quantity of the batch on the location. The completed quantity is the weighted quantity. The planned quantity is the quantity in the production order line.
The quantity will be displayed in black when the components are not yet weighted but there are enough available stock for the weighing. The quantity will be displayed in red when there are no available stock to weigh. The quantity will be displayed in green when the weighing is completed.
Select a batch and press the right arrow button to weigh the products from that batch.

Select item to weigh

6.5. Weigh product

Weigh the products. It is also possible to enter the weight manually.
The To-do quantity is the quantity that still needs to be weighed. It is calculated by {Planned quantity-Completed quantity}.
There are two indicator bars displayed on the screen. The to-do quantity is marked on both bars. When the quantity tolerance is greater than zero, the quantity tolerance range is also displayed on the indicator bars.
The weighed quantity is displayed in green on the indicator bars when the quantity is in range. The weighed quantity is displayed in yellow on the indicator bars when the quantity does not reach the minimum range of the to-do quantity. The weighed quantity is displayed in red on the indicator bars when the weighed quantity exceeds the maximum range of the to-do quantity.
Press the ‘<Tare>’ button to tare the scale.
Press the ‘<Zero>’ button to zero the scale.

In range

Less than

Exceeds

6.6. Select SSCC

Select the target SSCC for the weighed products. Press the ‘<new>’ button to move the weighed components to a new logistic unit or select an SSCC from the list and press it.

6.7. Finish weighing

Press the ‘Complete weighing’ button to register the weighing of quantities within the quantity range. When the Warehouse: new LU has been created (700) print event is set in the Organizational Structure, the system triggers prints the label. The default report for this print event is the ’DefaultLogisticsLabel.rpt’.
Press the ‘Partial (ask label)’ button to register the weighing of quantities less than the minimum quantity range. Based on the settings in the Production controller, the system might ask whether to print the label when the print event is set in the Organizational Structure.

Finish weighing

The weighed products will be moved to the input location automatically.
Press the ‘Return unweighed items’ button to move the unweighed items to the rest location. The system will ask for confirmation. Press the ‘Move’ button to move the unweighted items. Press the ‘Cancel’ button to cancel the movement.

Proceed

7. Move Components to the Production Line

You have the following options to move the picked components to the production line:

(1) If you produce with the Receipt from Production flow, the picked components can be moved to the production line with the Move to Production Line flow (see section 7.1 below).

(2) If you produce with the Production flow, you can use the Move to Production Line flow (see section 7.1 below) or you can move the components on the terminal (see 8.2.8. Move the components to the production line).

Note:

  • With default settings, components can only be moved from the input location to the production line. If the Allow to move stock to prod. line from rest location? setting is enabled on the Production controller, the components can also be moved from the rest location to the production line.
7.1. Move to Production Line flow
7.1.1. Start the flow

Tap the Move to production line button on the scanner.

Move to Production Line

7.1.2. Select a production line

Select the production line on the Select a production line screen and tap the right arrow.

 Select a production line

When there is no started production order on the selected line, the system displays the No started production order found message. Tap OK and the system goes back to the Select a production line screen.

No started production order found

7.1.3. Select a production order
  • If there is more than one started production order, the system displays the Select a production order to pick for screen.
    Select a production order, tap the right arrow and the system displays the Production information screen.
  • If there is one started production order, the Select a production order to pick for screen is skipped and the Production information screen is displayed.
  • The Production information screen displays the following information:
  1. Production order number
  2. Planned quantity
  3. The code, the description and the barcode of the item to produce
  4. The due date of the production order
  5. Remarks for the production order
  • Tap OK.

Select a production order and Production information screens

7.1.4. Select an item to move

After identifying the production order, the system lists the components from the production order on the Items to move screen. Only those components are listed that are available on the input location.

Note: Time registry items are not displayed on the list.

Next to the item code the system displays the quantity to be moved. Negative quantity means that the quantity on the production line exceeds the planned quantity.

Select an item and tap the right arrow button.

Items to move

7.1.5. Identify the SSCC to move

On the Identify the SSCC to move screen you have the following options:

  • a) scan the SSCC to move (see section (a) below),
  • b) move a partial logistic unit (see section (b) below),
  • c) go back to the Select a production line screen by tapping the Stop button or the left arrow.

Identify the SSCC to move

a) Scan the SSCC to move.

Note: Only SSCCs meeting the following conditions can be moved:

  • there are items linked to the production order on the logistic unit,
  • the logistic unit is stored on the input location of the production line.

When the SSCC is scanned and the logistic unit is moved to the production line, the system displays the Logistic unit/items are moved message. Tap OK.

The movement is registered in the Produmex office module in a Move document.

Logistic unit/items are moved

If there are other items to move, the system displays the Identify the SSCC to move screen.

If there is no more item to move, the flow is finished, and the system displays the Select a production line screen.

b) Move a partial logistic unit.

  • Tap the Partial logistic unit button.
  • On the Scan a product screen scan the product or tap the Select a product button and select the product from the displayed list.
  • Enter the number of items on the Enter the quantity screen and tap the right arrow.

Note: The moved quantity cannot exceed the available quantity on the input location, but it can exceed the planned quantity of the component on the production order.

The components are moved to the production line and the movement is registered in the Produmex office module in a Move document.

Scan a product

Enter quantity

If there are other items to move, the system goes back to the Identify the SSCC to move screen.

If there is no more item to move, the flow is finished, and the system displays the Select a production line screen.

8. Production

Produmex supports each of the three SAP B1 production order types.
Based on the significant differences between the ‘Disassembly’ type and the other two types of production orders, Produmex offers disassembly flows in addition to the production flows.
To perform ‘Standard’ and ‘Special’ type of production orders, the system offers two different production flows:

Receipt from production
The flow can be performed either on fixed terminals or on scanners. With default settings the production cannot be started on the thin client. After the production the calculated consumed quantity will be locked. Perform the material confirmation, component issues and the closing of the production order in the Production manager.

Production
The flow can only be executed on fixed terminals. The production can be started on the terminal. The consumed quantities can be modified on the terminal. After the consumed quantity has been confirmed the components are issued and an ’Issue for production’ document is created in SAP B1. In this flow, it is also possible to close the production order on the terminal.

When the ‘Main Touch Production Flow Script’ is set as the workflow for the touchscreen, the Production flow automatically starts on the touchscreen after logging in.

To perform ‘Disassembly’ type production orders, Produmex also has two disassembly flows. The main difference between the two flows is in the way of defining the disassembled quantities.

Disassembly
Enter the disassembled quantity one by one for each component.

Disassembly - weight
Add the disassembled quantities on a collective screen. It is possible to add the quantity by weighing with the linked scale.

It is also possible to perform ‘Disassembly’ type of production orders in the ‘Production’ or ‘Receipt from production flows’.

8.1. Receipt from Production
8.1.1. Select a production order

Select a production order from the list and press the right arrow button to proceed.
When using the default settings, only the production orders with ‘Started’ status are displayed in the list.
When the ‘Allow starting production order on receipt flow’ option is set to true on the Production controller, the released production orders with an assigned production line are displayed on the list too. The system will automatically change the status to ‘Started’ when proceeding with these orders.

Select a production order

On the scanner, ‘Started’ orders are indicated with an icon. ‘Standard’ and ‘Special’ type flows are indicated with the icon. ‘Disassembly’ productions are indicated with the icon.
After the production order has been selected, the system checks whether there are enough stock on the production line to produce. When there is not enough stock to produce, an error message is shown.

8.1.2. Select a task

If there is a by-product line on the production order, the Select task screen opens. This screen is automatically skipped if the production order does not contain by-products.

Identify batch

To produce the main product, press the ’Produce’ button.

To produce by-product(s), press the ’Produce by-products’ button. On the next screen select a by-product to produce from the list. Every by-product from the production order is listed.

The steps of main product and by-product production are similar. The differences are described at each given step.

Identify batch

8.1.3. Identify batch

Depending on the batch number settings for production the system might ask to enter the batchnumber, if the product is managed by batches.
Depending on the best before date settings for production, the system might ask to enter the best before date, if the product has a best before date.

Identify batch

When the product has batch attributes, the system asks for adding those attributes too.

8.1.4. Select logistic carrier and identify the SSCC

Then select the logistic carrier from the list. Every logistic carrier that has stock on the ‘Stor. Loc. logistic carriers’ location for the warehouse is listed.

Identify batch

To produce without a logistic carrier press the ‘Other tasks’ button. On the next screen select a task:

  • Press the ‘No logistic carrier’ button to produce onto a new SSCC.
  • Press the ‘Produce on existing SSCC’ button to produce onto an existing SSCC. On the next screen scan the target SSCC.

Identify batch

The system automatically proceeds to the Select a task screen and skips the Select a logistic carrier screen if there is no available logistic carrier on the ‘Stor. Loc. logistic carriers’ location or if the company does not use logistic carriers. In this case the ‘New SSCC’ button is displayed instead of the ‘No logistic carrier’ button. Press this button to produce onto a new SSCC. No logistic carrier will be linked to the produced item.

Identify batch

The system also proceeds automatically if the product has a ‘Default log. car. production’ set on the Produmex Production tab of the Item Master Data. In this case a ‘Proceed’ button is displayed instead of the ‘No logistic carrier’ button. Press this button to create a new SSCC with a linked logistic carrier.

Identify batch

8.1.5. Enter quantity

After the SSCC has been defined, add the produced quantity. By default the planned quantity is displayed, but it is possible to produce different quantities.
The maximum of the produced quantity for the main product is calculated based on the following values:

  • base quantity of the components from the production order
  • the quantity tolerance of components set in the production order
  • the available quantity on the production line

Please note: lined up components and time registration items are not taken into account when calculating the maximum quantity.

The calculation of the maximum quantity occurs in three steps:

  • First the system calculates the maximum producible quantity for each material based on only that material.
    Maximum quantity = Quantity on the production line/ (base quantity *(1-quantity tolerance))
  • Then the system selects the lowest value from the maximum producible quantities. To define the maximum quantity, the system rounds down that value to the decimal places specified for the uom in the Item Master Data of the product.

Enter quantity

The produced quantity for by-products is not limited by the available quantity of the materials on the production line.

In case of producing a catch weight item, enter the produced weight too. The maximum weight is calculated from the produced quantity, the default weight the and the weight tolerance defined in the Item Master Data of the product.
When the item to produce is managed by Produmex or ‘On release only’ type serial numbers, it is possible to add the quantity by scanning the serial numbers or by entering the quantity.
When the item to produce is managed by ‘On every transaction’ type serial numbers, the quantity can only be added by scanning the serial numbers.
For more information about quantity entering methods see: Screens for entering additional information.

Enter quantity

8.1.6. Production

After the quantity has been added, the product is produced. The system books a ‘Receipt from Production’ document and moves the product to the output location. The quality status of the received product is the quality status set as the ‘Quality status production’ on the Production tab of the Organizational Structure.

When the product is produced, the system locks the consumed stock. The locked quantity is calculated from the produced quantity and the base quantity of the component. Materials are not locked for by-products.

If set in the Organizational Structure, the ‘Production: logistic unit produced event (400)’ print event is triggered and the Production label is printed. The default report of the print event is DefaultProductionLabel.rpt.

8.1.8. Item produced

On the screen the ‘The item is produced’ message is displayed. Press ‘Ok’ to go back to the ‘Select a production order’ screen. When the ‘Proceed with current production order after entering quantity on prod. receipt flow?’ option is set to true in the Production controller, the system automatically proceeds with the current production order.

Item produced

As long as the production order is not closed, it is possible to produce more than the planned quantity.
Close the production in the Production Manager. If the ‘Automatically close production orders on completion? (Y/N)’ option is set to true in the Production controller, the production order will be automatically closed when the planned quantity for the main product has been reached. The Issue for Production documents will be booked with the planned quantities and the components will be issued.

8.2. Production flow

Production flow

8.2.1. Initiate the flow

To initiate the production flow, press the ‘Production’ button on the terminal.

Initiate the flow

8.2.2. Select production line

Select the production line where the production will take place. Press the right arrow button to proceed. Every active production line is displayed on the list.

Select production line

8.2.3. Select production order

Select a production order from a list. Released production orders that are assigned to the selected production line or that are not assigned to any line yet are displayed on the list.
When there is a started production order on the line, the system automatically proceeds with that order.

Select production order

8.2.4. Start production

After the production order has been selected, the system will display the details of the production:

  1. The code and description of the item to produce.
  2. The due date of the production order and the attached remarks.
  3. The type of the production indicated with an icon.
  4. The planned quantity.
  5. Production order number.

To start the production, press the ‘Start production’ button. When no production line was assigned to the order, it can be started at any production line. After the order has been started on a production line the system automatically assigns that line to the production order.

Start production

8.2.5. Identify batch

Depending on the batch number settings for production the system might ask to enter the batch number, if the product is managed by batches. If both the product and the by-product(s) are managed by batches, the batch number of the by-product(s) is the same as the batch number of the product.

Depending on the best before date settings for production, the system might ask to enter the best before date, if the product has a best before date. If the product and the by-product(s) have a best before date, the best before date of the by-product(s) is the same as the best before date of the product.

When the product has batch attributes, the system asks for adding those attributes too.

8.2.6. Select lined up location

When there are no components that has to be lined up, the system skips this screen.
When there is a component that has to be lined up in the production order, select the lined up location from the list. Different lined up component are displayed on separate screens. A location is listed if the following is verified:

  • The ‘Can be lined up’ option is enabled for the location
  • The location is added to the production line as a lined up location
  • A component that has to be lined up is stored on the location

When there is only one location that verifies these criteria, the system automatically proceeds with that location.
This screen can also be reached by pressing the ‘Change lined up locations’ button on production cockpit.

Select lined up location

8.2.7. Production cockpit

The next screen is the Production cockpit.

Production cockpit

  1. Code, description and barcode of the item to produce
  2. The planned quantity
  3. The number of the production order
  4. The due date of the production order
  5. The remarks added to the production order
  6. The type of the production order indicated with an icon
  7. The list of components that still have to be moved to the production line. The item code, description and barcode of the components and the needed quantity are displayed.
    The following components are not listed:
    • lined up components
    • time registration components
    • optional components
  8. Produce button (see 8.2.9.Produce)
  9. Produce by-products button (see 8.2.10. Produce by-products)
  10. Change lined up locations button (see: 8.2.6. Select lined up location)
  11. Add items to use button (see 8.2.8. Move components to production line)
  12. Print product label button (see 8.2.12.Print label)
  13. End production order button (see 8.2.13. End production)
  14. Clock button. Click the button to register time registration items (see 10. Time registration).
8.2.8. Move components to production line

The components can be moved either on the scanner or on the terminal. Use the ‘Move to production line’ flow to perform the move on the scanner.
Only stock from the production line’s input location can be moved to the production line. When the ‘Allow to move stock to prod. line from rest location’ option is set to true in the Production controller, stock from the rest location can be moved to the production line too.

Move components to production line

Press the ‘Add items to use’ button to perform the move on the touchscreen.
There are three possible ways to move the materials to the production line.

  • To move only one item, press the ‘Move an item‘ button. Identify the product to move.
    First scan the linked SSCC. When the product has no linked SSCC, press the ‘No SSCC’ button. On the next screen scan the product to move or select it from the list after pressing the ‘Select a product’ button. Every item on the input location is listed and can be moved.
    After the product has been identified, add the quantity. The moved quantity cannot exceed the quantity stored on the input location.
  • To move the entire stock of the components, press the ‘Move all items linked to the production order’ button. The system will move the entire stock of the items linked to the production order, regardless of the planned quantity.
  • To move everything from the input location press the ‘Move all items’ button. The system will move the entire stock from the input location, regardless of the planned quantity or the item.

When the ‘Hide all item buttons’ option is enabled in the Production controller, the system automatically proceeds with the ‘Move an item’ task after the ‘Add items to use’ button have been pressed.
When the ‘Auto move all linked items to BOM’ option is enabled in the Production controller, this step can be skipped as the components were automatically moved to the production line after initiating the flow.
After the components have been moved to the production line, the system registers the movement in a ‘Move’ document in the Produmex office module.

Move components to production line

When there are no items displayed on the ‘Items still to pick’ list, it means that all the required not lined up materials are already on the production line and are available for the production.

8.2.9. Produce

To produce the items, press the ‘Produce’ button.

Produce

After the ‘Produce’ button has been pressed, identify the SSCC to produce on. For the detailed description see: 8.1.4. Identify the SSCC
When the item to produce has batch attributes, the system will ask for adding those attributes too after the SSCC has been identified.
On the next screen enter the produced quantity.

Produce

After the SSCC has been defined, add the produced quantity. By default the planned quantity is displayed, but it is possible to produce different quantities.
The maximum of the produced quantity for the main product is calculated based on the following values:

  • base quantity of the components from the production order
  • the quantity tolerance of components set in the production order
  • the available quantity on the production line

Please note: lined up components and time registration items are not taken into account when calculating the maximum quantity.

The calculation of the maximum quantity occurs in three steps:

  • First the system calculates the maximum producible quantity for each material based on only that material.
    Maximum quantity = Quantity on the production line/ (base quantity *(1-quantity tolerance))
  • Then the system selects the lowest value from the maximum producible quantities. To define the maximum quantity, the system rounds down that value to the decimal places specified for the uom in the Item Master Data of the product.

Enter quantity

The produced quantity for by-products is not limited by the available quantity of the materials on the production line.

In case of producing a catch weight item, enter the produced weight too. The maximum weight is calculated from the produced quantity, the default weight the and the weight tolerance defined in the Item Master Data of the product.
When the item to produce is managed by Produmex or ‘On release only’ type serial numbers, it is possible to add the quantity by scanning the serial numbers or by entering the quantity.
When the item to produce is managed by ‘On every transaction’ type serial numbers, the quantity can only be added by scanning the serial numbers.
For more information about quantity entering methods see: Screens for entering additional information.

Enter quantity

8.2.10. Produce by-products

To produce by-products, press the ‘Produce by-products’ button. On the next screen select a by-product from the list. Every by-product from the production order is listed.

By-product

Then select the logistic carrier from the list. Every logistic carrier that has stock on the ‘Stor. Loc. logistic carriers’ location for the warehouse is listed.

By-product

To produce without a logistic carrier press the ‘Other tasks’ button. On the next screen select a task:

  • Press the ‘No SSCC’ button to produce without a logistic unit.
  • Press the ‘No logistic carrier’ button to produce onto a new SSCC.
  • Press the ‘Produce on existing SSCC’ button to produce onto an existing SSCC. On the next screen scan the target SSCC.

By-product

The system automatically proceeds to the Select a task screen and skips the Select a logistic carrier screen if there is no available logistic carrier on the ‘Stor. Loc. logistic carriers’ location or if the company does not use logistic carriers. In this case the ‘New SSCC’ button is displayed instead of the ‘No logistic carrier’ button. Press this button to produce onto a new SSCC. No logistic carrier will be linked to the produced item.

By-product

The system also proceeds automatically if the product/by-product has a ‘Default log. car. production’ set on the Produmex Production tab of the Item Master Data. In this case a ‘Proceed’ button is displayed instead of the ‘No logistic carrier’ button. Press this button to create a new SSCC with a linked logistic carrier.

By-product

On the next screen enter the quantity to produce. The quantity to produce is not limited by quantity of materials available on the production line. Displayed information:

  1. Production order number
  2. Item code and description
  3. Batch number of the main product/by-product
  4. Best before date of the main product/by-product
  5. Open quantity for the main product

By-product

After the by-product is produced, the system returns to the Production Cockpit.

In SAP Business One, the receipt from production document is created and the by-product is taken into stock on the output location of the production line.

8.2.11. Receive product

After the quantity has been added, the product is produced. The system moves the product to the output line and books a ‘Receipt from Production’ document.
The system issues the lined up materials and books an ‘Issue for production’ document for those components. The issued quantity is calculated as the product of the base quantity of the component and the produced quantity.

Note: If the Direct Consumption of Goods setting (Organizational Structure > Silo > General tab) is disabled, the raw materials are not consumed when closing the production order in the Production Flow. To close the production order the Production Manager must be used.

If set in the Organizational Structure, the ‘Production: logistic unit produced event (400)’ print event is triggered and the Production label is printed. Default report for the print event: DefaultProductionLabel.rpt

There is another way to print the label. On the main production screen press the ‘Print product label’ button. On the next screen add the produced quantity. The system automatically skips this screen, if there is already produced quantity. On the next screen add the number of labels to print.

8.2.13. End production

After the product was produced, the production can be continued, stopped or put on hold. This screen can also be reached by pressing the ‘End production order’ button on cockpit.

End production

To go back to the production lines without finishing the production, press the ‘Back to production lines’ button. The Produmex status of the production order will remain ‘Started’.
To go back to the production cockpit, press the left arrow button.
To put the production on hold, press the ‘Put on hold’ button. Issue for Production documents will be booked for the consumed quantities and the components will be issued but the production order will remain open.
To stop the production press the ‘Stop production’ button. Issue for Production documents will be booked for the consumed quantities and the components will be issued and the production order will be closed.
After pressing the ‘Stop production’ or the ‘Put on hold’ buttons, confirm the consumed quantities for the components.

8.2.14. Confirm the quantity to consume

The consumed quantity can be modified and confirmed on individual screens for each material. The consumed quantity of lined up materials cannot be modified or confirmed on the touchscreen. The consumed quantity of the time registration components can be added in the next step or after pressing the ‘Clock’ button on the Toolbar.
When the ‘Use waste?’ option is enabled in the Production controller, the waste quantities can be added as well.
When the ‘Skip consumption screen on flow for linked components?’ option is enabled in the Production controller, consumption screens for components that have been prepared (eg. weighted) will be skipped.

Confirm the quantity to consume

The stock on the input location is listed on the screen. The different batches are displayed in separate lines. Products stored on different SSCC’s are also displayed in separate lines.

  1. The ‘Item to consume’ is the item code and description of the component.
  2. The ‘Quantity to consume’ is the product of the produced quantity and the base quantity of the component.
  3. The ‘Difference qty to use’ is the difference of the ‘Quantity to consume’ and the ‘# Used’ quantity.
  4. The batch number, the second batch number and the best before date of the batch.
  5. The ‘# On line’ quantity is the quantity of the stock that was moved to the production line.
  6. The ‘#Used’ quantity is the quantity that was consumed for the production.
  7. The ‘#Rest’ quantity is the quantity remaining on the production line.
  8. The ‘#Waste’ quantity is the quantity of the waste.

The default ‘# Used’ quantity is calculated based on the following logic:

  • If the available quantity is greater than or equal to the quantity to consume:
    Default #Used quantity = Quantity to consume.
  • If the available quantity is less than the quantity to consume but within the quantity range:
    Default #Used quantity = Available quantity.

When the ‘Auto fill consumed quantity from prepared quantity on stop production?’ option is set to true in the Production controller, the default ‘#Used’ quantity for prepared components (eg. weighted) is the prepared quantity, if it is within the quantity range.
The ‘# Rest’ quantity is the quantity of the stock remaining on the production line. It is calculated by {‘#On line’ quantity - ‘# Used’ quantity}.
The # Used (9) and the # Rest (10) quantity of the selected batch can be modified in the respective input field. After the modification press the ‘Update’ button.
Please note: The ‘# Used quantity’ must be within the quantity range defined by the produced quantity and the components base quantity and quantity tolerance. Because the sum of the ‘# Used’ and ‘# Rest’ quantity must be equal to the on line quantity, when modifying either one of them, the other one is automatically updated.
In case of using waste, the # On line quantity is equal to with the sum of the # Used, # Rest and # Waste quantity. When modifying the used or the rest quantity, the system updates the waste (12) quantity automatically. The # waste field cannot be modified manually on the touchscreen.
When confirming the consumed quantity of a serial numbered item, add the serial numbers of the consumed products too. After the consumed quantity has been added, the system ask the method of entering the serial numbers. Select a method then on the next screen scan the serial numbers.

In case of a catch weight component, the default weights are displayed too.

  1. The weight to consume. It is calculated from quantity to consume and the weight defined in the Item Master Data.
  2. The On line, Used, Rest and Waste weight of the batch. By default it is calculated from the weight of the batch available on the production line and the quantity to consume.
  3. The On line, Used, Rest and Waste weight of the item. By default it is calculated from the weight of the item available on the production line and the quantity to consume.
  4. The used weight of the selected batch can be modified in this field.
  5. The rest weight of the selected batch can be modified in this field.
  6. The waste weight of the selected batch is displayed in this field.

Confirm the quantity to consume - catch weight

Press the right arrow button to proceed to the next component.

8.2.15. Time registration

When the production order contains time registration components, define the consumed quantity for those components as well. For more information about time registration see: 10. Time registration

Time registration

8.2.16. Issue components

Once the material consumption is confirmed, the used quantities are issued and an ‘Issue for production’ document is booked. Waste quantities are booked in a separate ‘Issue for production’ document. Time registration items are issued in a separate ‘Issue for production document’ too.
The remaining stock is moved to the rest location of the production line. The movement is registered in a Move document in the Produmex office module.

8.2.17. Production order status

When stopping the production order, the Produmex and the SAP status of the production order will be changed to ‘Closed’.
When putting the production on hold, the Produmex status on the production order will be changed to ‘On hold’, but the SAP status of the production order will remain ‘Released’. The production can be continued after a restart on the production line. The production can only be restarted on the production line where it was performed previously. It is not possible to start an ‘On hold’ production in the Production Manager.

Production order

8.3. Disassembly

Disassembly flow

8.3.1. Initiate the flow

Press the ‘Disassembly’ button on the touchscreen.

Initiate the flow

8.3.2. Select production line
8.3.3. Select the production order

Select the production order from the list. Only released disassembly orders assigned to the selected production line or not yet assigned to any line are displayed on the list.

Select the production order

8.3.4. Start production

After the order has been selected, the details of the disassembly will be displayed. Press the ‘Start production’ button to start the disassembly. For more information about the displayed production details see: 8.2.4. Start production
When there is a stared disassembly order, the system automatically proceeds with that order.

Start production

8.3.6. Disassembly cockpit

The next screen is the disassembly cockpit.

  1. Code, description and barcode of the item to produce.
  2. The planned quantity in the production order.
  3. The number of the production order.
  4. The due date of the production order and the attached remarks.
  5. The type of the production order indicated with an icon.
  6. The product to disassemble is listed here. The quantity that still need to be moved to the production line is displayed next to the item code and description.
  7. ‘Disassemble’button. See: 8.3.8. Disassemble
  8. ‘Add items to use’buton. See: 8.3.7. Move to the production line
  9. ‘Print product label’ button. See: 8.2.11. Print label
  10. ‘End production order’. See: 8.3.10. End production

Disassembly cockpit

8.3.7. Move to the production line

Add the item to disassemble to the production line. Press the ‘Add items to use’ button or move the item with the ‘Move to production line’ flow. For more information about moving the item to the production line see: 8.2.8. Move the components to the production line

Move to the production line

8.3.8. Disassemble

Add the item to disassemble to the production line. Press the ‘Add items to use’ button or move the item with the ‘Move to production line’ flow. For more information about moving the item to the production line see: 8.2.8. Move the components to the production line

 Disassemble

After the ‘Disassemble’ button has been pressed a list of components are displayed on the screen. Only components from the disassembly order will be displayed on the list. Select a component from the list.

 Disassemble

If the item is managed by batches, depending on the batch number settings for production the system might ask to enter the batch number.
If the item has a best before date, depending on the best before date settings for production, the system might ask to enter the best before date.
If the item has batch attributes, the system asks for adding those attributes too.

On the next screen identify the destination logistic unit. See: 8.1.4. Identify the SSCC
Add the quantity disassembled of the selected component. The quantity is the base quantity multiplied by the quantity of the product on the production line. The maximum quantity is calculated from the base quantity and the quantity tolerance of the component and the available quantity of the product on the production line.

 Disassemble

In the case of a catch weight component, enter the weight too. The weight range that can be added is calculated from the quantity of the component disassembled and the catch weight settings of the item.
When a component is managed by ‘On every transaction’ type serial numbers, add the quantity by scanning the serial numbers.
When a component is managed by PMX or ‘On release only’ type serial numbers, the quantity can also be added by scanning the serial numbers.
In the case of a lined up component, select the lined up location after the quantity has been added.

 Disassemble

Press the right arrow button to proceed.

8.3.9. Receive product

After the quantity has been added, the system books a ‘Receipt from production’ document for the component. If set in the Organizational Structure, the ‘Production: logistic unit produced event (400)’ print event is triggered and the Production label is printed. Default report for the print event: DefaultProductionLabel.rpt. The system displays the ‘The item is disassembled’ message.
Then the system goes back to the select a product screen. After every component has been disassembled, press the left arrow button to go back to the disassembly cockpit.

Receive product

8.3.10. End production

Press the ‘End production order’ button to quit from the disassembly. After the button has been pressed, select a task.
To go back to the production lines, press the ‘Back to production lines’ button. The Produmex status of the disassembly will remain ‘Started’.
To put the disassembly on hold, press the ‘Put on hold’ button.
To stop the production, press the ‘Stop production’ button.
After the ‘Put on hold’ or the ‘Stop production’ button has been pressed, confirm the consumed quantity.
In case the disassembled quantity of at least one item does not reach the minimum quantity calculated from the quantity of the product on the production line, the base quantity and quantity tolerance of the component and the disassembled quantity of other components, the system displays an error message. To go back to the disassembly cockpit, acknowledge the message by pressing the ‘Ok’ button.

End production

8.3.11. Confirm the consumed quantity

On the next screen, confirm the consumed quantity.

  1. Item to consume: the item code and description of the disassembled product.
  2. Quantity to consume. The quantity to consume is calculated based on the following logic:
    • First the system calculates for each component the theoretical quantity to disassemble in order to produce the previously added component quantity.
      {Quantity to disassemble = Disassembled quantity / Base quantity}
    • Then the system select the lowest value (the component linked to that value is the limiting component) and rounds it to the decimals defined for the uom in the product’s Item Master Data.
      In the case of catch weight products, the weight to consume is displayed under the quantity to consume. The weight to consume is the product of the quantity to consume and the weight defined for the item in the Item Master Data.
  3. Difference qty to use: the difference of the quantity to consume and the #used quantity.
  4. The batch number, the second batch number and the best before date of the batch. Different batches are displayed in separate lines.
  5. The ‘# On line’ quantity is the quantity of the product that was moved to the production line. In the case of catch weight products, the on line weight is also displayed.
  6. The ‘#Used’ quantity is the quantity that was consumed for the production. By default the used quantity equals to the quantity to consume. In the case of catch weight products, the used weight is also displayed. By default the used weight equals to the weight to consume.
  7. The ‘# Rest’ quantity is the quantity remaining on the production line. In the case of catch weight products, the rest weight is also displayed.
  8. The ‘# Waste’ quantity is the quantity of the waste. In the case of catch weight products, the waste weight is also displayed.

The # Used (9) and the # Rest (10) quantity of the selected batch can be modified in the respective input field. After the modification press the ‘Update’ button. In case of catch weight products, also modify the weights. After the modification press the ‘Update’ button.
In case of using waste, the # On line quantity is equal to with the sum of the # Used, # Rest and # Waste quantity. When modifying the used or the rest quantity, the system updates the waste (11) quantity automatically. The # waste field cannot be modified manually on the touchscreen.

Confirm the consumed quantity

8.3.11. Production order status
8.4. Disassembly - weight

Disassembly - weight flow

8.4.1. Initiate the flow

Press the ‘Disassembly- weight’ button on the touchscreen.

8.4.2. Select production line
8.4.3. Select production order
8.4.4. Start production order
8.4.5. Identify the batch
8.4.6. Disassembly cockpit
8.4.7. Move to production line
8.4.8. Disassemble

After adding the products, press the ‘Disassemble’ button. On the next screen identify the destination logistic unit. See: 8.1.4. Identify the SSCC

Weigh a component or enter the quantity manually. Then press the button of the component to add the weighted quantity to the system.

  • If the component is managed by batches, depending on the batch number settings for production the system might ask to enter the batch number.
  • If the component has a best before date, depending on the best before date settings for production, the system might ask to enter the best before date.
  • If the component has batch attributes, the system asks for adding those attributes too.

After the quantity has been added, the system books a ‘Receipt from production’ document and moves the component to the output location.

When added quantity exceeds the maximum quantity, the system displays an error message. The maximum quantity is calculated from the base quantity and the quantity tolerance of the component and the available quantity of the product on the line.

Proceed with the next component. After every component has been weighted, press the right arrow button to continue with the flow.

Press the ‘Logistic carrier is full’ button to continue the disassembly onto another logistic carrier. After the button has been pressed, the ‘Production: logistic unit produced event (400)’ print event is triggered and the production label is printed. The default report for the print event is DefaultProductionLabel.rpt. On the next screen identify the new destination logistic unit.

To go back to the disassembly cockpit, press the left arrow button. . After the button has been pressed, the ‘Production: logistic unit produced event (400)’ print event is triggered and the production label is printed. The default report for the print event is DefaultProductionLabel.rpt.

Disassemble

8.4.9. End production order

On the main production screen press the ‘End production order’ button.
See: 8.3.9. End production order and 8.3.10. Confirm the consumed quantity

8.4.10. Production order status

9. Finish production

Production orders can be finished in the office environment with the Production Manager. When producing with the ‘Production’ flow, the closing of the production can also be performed on the terminal.

9.1. Office

Select the production line and click on the ‘Detail’ button. The ‘Detail’ button is only active, if there is a started production order assigned to the selected production line.
The produced quantity is displayed on the screen but it cannot be modified on the Production Manager.
On the ‘Production detail’ screen click on the ‘Finish production’ button. The closing process depends on the selected production manager type for the production line.

9.1.1. Production manager type: SPL_CONS_LOCK

When the production manager type is set to SPL_CONS_LOCK for the Production Line, the system will use the stock locked during the production as the base of the consumption.
On the ‘Stop production’ window add the consumed quantities.
The lined up and not lined up components are displayed in separate sections. Different batches are displayed in separate lines. The number of the displayed rows can be limited on the Production controller. Time registrations cannot be modified on the Production manager.

Not lined up ingredients

Add the used quantity to the line of the batch it was consumed from. By default the used quantity is zero. It is also possible to define the used quantity by adding the remaining quantity. Because the sum of the ‘# Used’ and ‘# Remaining’ quantity must be equal to the ‘# On line’ quantity, when modifying either one of them, the other one is automatically updated.
The added consumed quantity cannot exceed the on line quantity.
By default the used weight is also zero. When adding the used or the remaining quantity of a catch weight item, the system automatically fills the standard weight based on the ingredient’s catch weight settings. It is possible to modify the weight within the allowed quantity tolerance defined in the Item Master Data.

When the ‘Use waste?’ option is enabled in the Production controller, the waste quantity and the waste weight can be added as well. In this case the # On line quantity equals with the sum of the # Used, # Rest and # Waste quantities. After modifying two of those fields, the system automatically updates the third one. The # waste field can only be modified if the ‘Allow waste to be editable when finishing production on production manager?’ option is set to true in the Production controller.
When there are serial numbered items among the ingredients, the serial numbers of the consumed product must be selected. Click on the serial number field in the line of ingredient managed by serial numbers. A ‘Serial Number Selection’ window will open up. Select the serial numbers of the consumed products.

Lined up ingredients

Since the used quantity of the lined up ingredients cannot be measured, define it by modifying the quantity remaining in the tank. The # used quantity cannot be changed directly. The system will calculate the used quantity by subtracting the remaining quantity from the in tank quantity before the production.

9.1.2. Production manager type: MPL_CONS_INPUT

When the production manager type is set to MPL_CONS_INPUT for the Production Line, every production order started on a production line with the same input location as the selected production line will be closed in one step. The system will use the stock on the input location as the base of the consumption.

9.1.2.1. Confirm material consumption

On the ‘Stop production’ screen started production orders assigned to production lines with the same input location are listed.
The lined up and not lined up components for the selected production order are displayed in separate sections. Different batches are displayed in separate lines. The number of the displayed rows can be limited on the Production controller. Time registrations cannot be modified on the Production manager.

Not lined up ingredients

When the production manager type is MPL_CONS_INPUT, the used quantity and weight cannot be modified.
The system will issue the entire stock located on the input location for the component. When the production orders have common materials, the system will divide the stock to issue between the production orders based on the theoretical quantities of the component.

Lined up ingredients

Since the used quantity of the lined up ingredients cannot be measured, define it by modifying the quantity remaining in the tank. The # used quantity cannot be changed directly. The system will calculate the used quantity by subtracting the remaining quantity from the in tank quantity before the production.

9.1.3. Close the production

To close the production, press the ‘Stop production’ button.
After the button has been pressed,

  • the system will remove the lock from the components
  • the used and waste quantity of the ingredients will be issued and an ‘Issue for production’ document will be created. Waste quantities are displayed in separate lines and indicated as waste in the ‘Issue for production’ document. For more information about additional Produmex production issue lines see: 3.3.4. Production issue lines.
  • the remaining quantity of the ingredients will be moved to the rest location of the production line and a ‘Move’ document will be created
  • the used quantities will be added to the ‘Issued’ field of the production order
  • both the SAP and Produmex status will be changed to ‘Closed’ on the production order

9.2. Shopfloor

For the detailed description about finishing the production on the shopfloor see:
8.2.1.2 End production 8.3.9. End production (disassembly)

10. Time registration

With the help of the time registration module it is possible to book activity costs for activities performed during the production. (E.g. setup time, working hours, downtime).

10.1. Office

Add a time registration type item to the BoM or to the production order. For more information about time registration items see: 3.1.3. Produmex Production Tab.

Add a time registration type item or resource to the BoM or to the production order.

BoM

10.2. Shopfloor

Since time registration type components are used for measuring time, there is no need to pick and move them to the production line. Therefore time registration components are not listed during the picking and moving flows.
Time registration can be used in both production flows, but it is only available on the touchscreen. It is not recommended to use the time registration during multiple step products executed with the production step list.

10.2.1. Initiate the time registration

Press the ‘Clock’ button on the toolbar to start registering time. In case of ‘Production’ flow, the button is active on the Production cockpit screen. In case of ‘Production Receipt’ flow, press the button before selecting the production order.

Initiate the time registration

10.2.2. Select a time registration item

Select a time registration item from the list. Only time registration items/resources linked to the production order are listed.

Select a time registration item

10.2.3. Select a task

Press the ‘Start’ button to start a new time registration. To go back to the production cockpit, press the left arrow button.
Press the ‘Stop’ button to finish the time registration. The button is only available if there is a started time registration. For more information please see: Select an operator
Press the ‘# Hours’ button to add the time manually. For more information please see: Enter the hours manually
Press the ‘Downtime’ button to register downtime. The button is only available if there is a started time registration. For more information please see: Registering downtime
Press the ‘Overview’ button to see the overview of the booked time registrations. For more information please see: Overview

Select a task

10.2.4. Enter the hours manually

Press the ‘# Hours’ button. The unit of measurement of the entered value will be the UoM of the time registration component. In this document we will assume that the UoM is “hours”. On the next screen add the number of hours. The number of the hours is not limited.
After the number of hours has been entered, the system asks whether to register downtime or not. Press the ‘Yes’ button to register downtime. Press the ‘No’ button to proceed without registering downtime.

Enter the hours manually

10.2.5. Registering downtime

Press the Downtime button. On the next screen select a downtime type from the list. Every downtime type set in the default forms are listed. For more information about the downtime types see: 3.2.3.13. Down time types

Registering downtime

After the downtime type has been selected, enter the number of hours.

Number of hours

The system will asks whether to register another downtime or not. Press ‘Yes’ to register another downtime. Proceed as described above. Press ‘No’ to proceed without registering another downtime.

10.2.6. Overview

Press the ‘Overview’ button. On the next screen it is possible to adjust the registered hours and the linked operator(s) of a selected time registration. It is also possible to remove a time registration entry. Select the line and press the ‘Delete’ button.

Overview

10.2.7. Stop time registration

Press the ‘Stop’ button. After the stop button has been pressed, the timer stops. The time registry item will be issued with the measured time.

10.2.8. Select an operator

After the time registration has been stopped or the number of hours has been entered, the system asks for the operator. Select the operator(s) from the list then proceed with the right arrow button.
Employees set in SAP B1 can be selected as operators. It is possible to select multiple operators for one time registration entry.

Select an operator

10.2.9. Issuing the time registration items

After the production is finished, time registration components are booked with the reported quantities on a separate Issue for Production document.

The measured quantity is also booked as consumed capacity for the resource on the given day. It is possible to exceed the daily implementation capacity.

Please note: The production order cannot be closed if there is no sufficient stock for the time registration item.

The time registration results are stored in the PMX_TRHE table.

11. Multiple step productions with the production order step list

With the production order step list, it is possible to group multiple step productions into one production order. Execute step list productions in the ‘Production’ flow only.
With multiple step production, the production of the intermediate product(s) and the end products can be grouped together. Produmex also supports the scenario where the intermediate product is the result of a disassembly production. Execute step list productions in the ‘Production’ flow only.

11.1. Create step list

Open the Production order step list. The step list can be opened from the Produmex Production module.
Add the end product to the ‘Item to produce’ field.
Add a description to the ‘Description’ field.
Press the ‘Add line’ button to add a new line. Select a component on the line. Set the ‘Is Disassembly?’ option to true if the added item needs to be disassembled in order to produce the intermediate product.
Add the end product to the list too.
Pres the ’Add’ button to create the step list.

Create step list

Create step list

11.2. Create production order

Create a new production order. Set the type of the order as ‘Special’ (1).
Select the end product as the item to produce (2). In the next field (3) select the step list from the dropdown menu. Only step list for the item to produce will be displayed.
For more information about the production order settings for using the step list see: 3.3.2. Production order header.

Create production order

After the step list has been selected, the system automatically fills the production order lines with data copied from the BOM of the items added to the production step list (4).
In case of intermediate product is the result of a disassembly, the product to disassemble is added to the production order as a component (5).
The intermediate product(s) are also added to the production order, but as an optional item (6).
The production order lines cannot be modified on step list orders.

11.3. Execute the production

Execute the production as described in the Production Guide.
After pressing the ’Produce’ button, add the produced quantity of the end product. The produced quantity of the intermediate product can be added after the ’stop production’ or the ’Put on hold’ button has been pressed.

11.4. End production

To end the production, press the ‘End production’ button. On the next screen select a task.
Press the ‘Back to production lines’ button to go back to the production lines.
Press the ‘Put on hold’ button to put the production on hold. Press the ‘Stop production’ button to stop the production. After pressing the ‘Stop production’ or the ‘Put on hold’ buttons, confirm the produced and the consumed quantities.

11.5. Enter the quantity of the produced intermediate item

Enter the quantity of the produced intermediate item. There is no limit to the entered quantity, but the system will display an error message if while confirming the consumed quantities and there is an insufficient stock on the production line.

Enter the quantity of the produced intermediate item

11.6. Enter the quantity to consume for the optional item

Enter the consumed quantity of the optional item. The entered quantity cannot exceed the quantity available on the production line.

Enter the quantity to consume for the optional item

When the end product was not produced, the system skips this screen. When the consumed quantity is greater than zero, then confirm the consumed quantity on the next screen. For more information about the consumed quantity confirmation screens see: 8.2.13. Confirm the quantity to consume.

11.7. Confirm the quantity to consume for the components

For more information about the consumed quantity confirmation screen see: 8.2.13. Confirm the quantity to consume.
In case of step list productions, the quantity to consume of a component is the sum of the calculated quantity to consume for the intermediate and the end product.
After the consumed quantities have been confirmed, the system issues the used quantities and books an ‘Issue for production’ document. The rest quantities are moved to the rest location and the movement is registered in a Move document in the Produmex office module.

Confirm the quantity to consume for the components

11.8. Add the quantity of the output item to process

First enter the output quantity of the end product. The maximum quantity is the produced quantity of the end product.
These screens are used to verify the produced quantity. The entered quantity cannot exceed the produced quantity.
First confirm the produced quantity of the end product by entering the output quantity. On the next screen add the output quantity of the intermediate product.

Add the quantity of the output item to process

11.9. Issue components/ Receive product

After the consumed quantities have been added, the system issues the components with the confirmed quantity and books an ’Issue for production’ document.
The remaining stock is moved to the production line, and the movement is registered in a Move document in the Produmex office module.
The produced intermediate product is moved to the output of the production line.
The system either closes or puts on hold the production order, depending on which button was pressed in the 11.4. End production step.

15.2.12. Put away – Production

The Put away for production generator controls the creation of the put away orders. When the standard Produmex WMS product is used, a put away order is created after the (by-) product is produced onto a logistic unit. No production put away order is generated when producing without an SSCC.

To start the flow, select the Put away option from the Production main menu.

15.2.12.1. Select the source location

Every location that set as an output location of a production line is listed from the warehouses assigned to the thin client.

15.2.12.2. Scan an SSCC

On the next screen every SSCC that belongs to an open production put away order for the location is listed. Scan the SSCC to move.

15.2.12.3. Scan destination location

Then scan the destination location. It is also possible to select the destination location from a list.

  • Press the ‘Select location’ button to see the list of active locations in the warehouse of the selected output location.
  • Press the ‘Select empty location’ button to see the list of every empty active location from the warehouse of the selected output location.

On the bottom of the screen the Default location is displayed.

When the location suggestion is enabled for the warehouse, the Default location is the first suggested location calculated based on the logic described in Location suggestions.

When the location suggestion is not enabled for the warehouse, the Default location is the standard location set for the given warehouse on the Produmex Inventory tab of the Item Master Data of the item. If the items to move have different standard location set for the warehouse, no default location is displayed.

15.2.12.4. Logistic unit is moved

After the destination location is selected, the SSCC is moved to that location. The ‘Logistic unit/Items are moved’ message is displayed on the scanner. Press ‘OK’ to acknowledge the message. The system returns to the ‘Scan an SSCC’ screen.

16. Returnable items

Returnable items, such as logistic carriers and reusable packaging, require a special information processing in order to maintain the inventory correctly and to handle the deposit that has to be charged for it.

Produmex Logistic provides a special procedure to manage returnable items. With the help of this procedure double bookings can be avoided and the returnable item(s) will be added automatically to the receipt/ delivery document, when adding an item that contains returnable items.

16.1. Company settings

1.1. Adjust how to handle returnable items

Configure the booking of the returnable items on the Business Partner Master Data and on the ‘General’ tab of the Organizational Structure. For more information please see:

Please note: When using perpetual inventory, only inventory returnable items will be added to the documents.

Company settings

16.1.2. Quality status of a returnable item

Specify the quality status of a returnable item on the ‘Defaults’ tab. For more information see: 5.1.2. Defaults

16.1.3. Storage location of the inventory returnable items

Define the storage location for the warehouse where the inventory returnable items will be stored. For more information see: 5.2.1. Warehouse settings

16.2. Create returnable items

To ensure the accuracy of the inventory of the returnable items and to enable the traceability, create two variants of the returnable item: a non-inventory returnable item and an inventory returnable item.

Because returnable items play an important role in the packaging, receiving and shipping process of goods, companies that use returnable items have to make sure that they always have sufficient stock of returnable items. Therefore returnable items have to be treated as inventory items.

However during the administrative goods receipt and the sales and delivery of these trade items it is necessary to mention and charge the returnable items on receipt and delivery notes and invoices, but it has to be avoided that the inventory of returnable items is increased or decreased incorrectly (double booking). For this purpose use the non-inventory returnable item.

First create the non-inventory returnable item. For more information about the settings of the Produmex Item Master Data tabs, please see: Produmex Inventory Tab
Please note: Even though using inventory returnable items for the documents, non-inventory items have to be created.

Non inventory item

Then create the inventory returnable item. Link the returnable items by adding the code of the non-inventory returnable item to the “Non inventory returnable item code” field.

Inventory item

16.3. Define BoM

Returnable items are no commercial trade items by themselves, but are the part of a trade item as the container/packaging. To establish a link between the trade item and the returnable item, create a ‘Production’ type Bill of Materials for the trade item.
A trade item can contain several returnable items.

Bill of Materials

In the example our trade item is the “Beer 0.33” which consist of 0.33L “Beer” and a “Bottle”. The “Bottle” is an inventory returnable item.

16.4. Trade process

Create the purchse/sales order for the trade item only. When purchasing/selling a trade item that contains returnable items, the system will automatically add the returnable item(s) to the receipt/delivery document. Depending on the used accounting system and the company level settings of the Organizational Structure, the added returnable item can be an inventory and a non-inventory item.

An extra, “Ret.ItemsPrice” column is added to the grid. In this column the price of all returnable item for a single trade item will be displayed.

16.4.1. Purchase

Purchase order

When the added returnable item is an inventory item, the inventory returnable item will be added to the storage location defined for returnable items after a purchase.

Inventory report

16.4.2. Sales

Sales order

When the added returnable item is an inventory item, the user do not have to pick the inventory returnable items, but a delivery note can only be created when there is sufficient stock from the inventory returnable item.

17. Stock allocation algorithm

17.1. Inventory lock

The locking function is used to reserve stock for specific documents/processes. Stock transactions on locked stocks that would modify one of the parameters defined in the lock are not allowed.

Produmex uses multiple levels of locks:

  • Item/ Quality status: The item, the warehouse and the quality status is defined for the lock.
  • Batch: The item, the warehouse, the quality status and the BatchID is defined for the lock.
  • LUID: The item, the warehouse, the quality status, the BatchID and the LUID is defined for the lock.
  • Detail: The item, the warehouse, the quality status, the BatchID the LUID and the location code is defined for the lock.

Locks can be user created or system generated.
System locks will be generated in the following processes:

  • adding a batch to a sales order: ‘Batch’ locking
  • pick list proposal generated: ‘Batch’ or ‘LUID’ locking, based on the ‘Stock order by’ setting on the Pick list proposal generator
  • pick list generated: ‘Batch’ or ‘LUID’ level locking, based on the pick list proposal
  • pick list status converted to ‘Ready’ in normal picking: ‘Detail’ level locking
  • after an item has been picked in ad hoc picking: ‘Detail’ level locking
  • Receipt from production flow: ‘Detail’ locking for ingredients to be used

Note: If the Do Not Lock Stock on Picking option is enabled on the General tab of the Organization Structure, no lock is created for picklist proposals and picklists.

The stock locked by the user can be linked to a customer or a base document.
There are several ways to create inventory locks manually:

  • On the PMX inventory report
    It is possible to create batch or LUID level locking, linked to the customer or the base document on the Inventory report. Click on Locking>Add. On the opening screen select the locking level and the customer, then add the quantity to lock. Select the sales order or sales invoice if needed. Please note: when creating a locking linked to the sales order/invoice, the locked quantity cannot exceed the ordered quantity.
  • Locking in advance: After the reception a LUID level locking will be created for the customer. Please note: Only products with a quality status that can be shipped will be locked.
Locking level
Item/Quality status Batch LUID Detail
System generated
Sales order Linked to the base document
Pick list proposal Linked to the base document Linked to the base document
Pick list ‘Not Ready’ Linked to the base document Linked to the base document
Pick list ‘Ready’ in normal picking Linked to the base document
Item picked in Ad hoc picking Linked to the base document
Receipt from Production Linked to the base document
User created
PMX inventory report Linked to the customer or the base document Linked to the customer or the base document
Stock allocation screen Linked to the customer or the base document Linked to the customer or the base document
Locking in advance Linked to the customer

Existing locks can be seen on the PMX inventory report. Select a line, then click on Locking > View. On the opening ‘Locked quantity’ screen every lock for the item on the selected line will be listed.

17.2. Pick list proposal

Pick list proposals can be created for the following documents:

Picklist proposal

When creating a pick list proposal, the system performs the following logic to allocate stock:
1. Get locked stock linked to the base document
If there is locked stock linked to the base document, the system will propose that stock.

2. Get locked stock linked to the customer
If there are no locked stock linked to the base document or the quantity of the locked stock is not sufficient, then the system will check if there are locked stock linked to the customer.
When there is stock locked for the customer, the system will propose that stock. If the quantity of the locked stock exceeds the ordered quantity, the system will sort the locked stock based on the option selected as ‘Stock order by’ and will allocate the stock from the first line.

3. Get the list of free stock
If there is no locked stock linked to the customer or the quantity of the locked stock is not sufficient, then the system will filter the free stock to create the list of the stock that are allowed to be picked.

A stock will be listed if the following verifies:

  • The stock is located in the selected warehouse
  • The stock is not locked for other customer or base document
  • Quality status can be picked and shipped
  • Not expired stock
  • Stock within external shelf life
  • If there are batch attributes selected on the sales order, then only batches with matching batch attributes will be listed

Stock located on:

  • Locations where the ‘Block stock from being used for the picking process’ option is enabled will not be taken into account.

After the list of the stock that is available for picking has been created, the system sorts it based on the ‘Stock order by’ setting on the Pick list proposal generator. No pick list proposal will be created if there is no available stock.
When the pick list proposal is generated, the proposed stock will be locked except if the ‘Do not lock stock on picking (pick lists can be created even if no stock is available)’ option is set to true on the on General settings. The level of the locking depends on the selected ‘Stock order by’ setting.
When the proposal line is using stock that was locked for a sales order or customer, this locking is removed and replaced by a locking linked to the proposal line. The level of the locking will be kept regardless of the ‘Stock order by’ setting.

If the ’Show pick list proposal info screen on incomplete proposal?’ option is enabled on the Pick List Proposal generator, an additional screen will open when creating pick list proposal but the total ordered quantity could not be allocated for the pick list proposal.

Pick List Proposal Info

Multiple pick list proposals

Multiple pick list proposals will be created for a single document in the following scenarios:

  • The sales order/sales invoice lines have different Shipping type. The following shipping type settings are taken into account for splitting document lines into several proposals:
    • Automatic shipping?
    • Automatic invoicing?
    • Is customer coming to collect?
  • The document lines have different warehouses assigned.
  • The document lines have different Ship-to Names assigned.
  • For the Produmex pick list type of the sales order/sales invoice the ‘Split PL on item pick type?’ and/or the ‘Split PL on item pick type 2?’ option is set to ‘Yes’ and there are items on the sales order that has different ‘Pick type’/’Pick type 2’ set on the Produmex Sales tab of the Item Master Data.
  • The number of the pallets linked to the pick list proposal is higher than the ’Number of pallets’ defined for the Produmex pick list type of the sales order/sales invoice. The number of pallets linked to the pick list proposal is calculated based on the ‘Default quantity on logistical unit’ value that was specified on the Produmex Inventory tab of the Item Master Data of the item and the ordered quantity. If there is not enough stock to fulfill the proposal, the number of pallets will be calculated based on the free quantity that can be allocated for the proposal.

    EXAMPLE:
    The default quantity on a logistic unit is 10 pcs for Item A and 20pcs for Item B. The number of the pallets for the pick list type is 5.

    Sales order 1:
    Item A: 30pcs = 3 x 10pcs = 3 pallets
    Item B: 20pcs = 1 x 20pcs = 1 pallet
    3 + 1 = 4 < 5 → 1 pick list proposal
    Because the total number of pallets needed to fulfill the order is less than the number of pallets allowed on a pick list proposal, only one pick list proposal is created.

    Sales order 2:
    Item A: 60 pcs = 6 x 10pcs = 6 pallets
    Item B: 105 pcs = 5.25 x 20pcs = 5.25 pallets
    6 + 5.25 = 11.25 > 5 → 3 pick list proposals
    Because the total number of pallets needed to fulfill the order is greater than the number of pallets allowed on the pick list proposal, the pick list proposal is split.
    1. The first proposal is created for 5 pallets of Item A, which is 50pcs.
    2. The second proposal is created for the remaining 1 pallet of Item A and 4 pallets of Item B, which is 10pcs of Item A and 80pcs of Item B.
    3. The third proposal is created for the remaining 2 pallets of Item B, which is 25pcs.

    Sales order 3:
    Item A: 5 pcs
    Item B: 84 pcs
    Item A: 3 pcs
    The system groups the lines of Item A:
    Item A: 5pcs + 3pcs = 8pcs = 0.8 pallet
    Item B: 84 pcs = 4.2x 20pcs = 4.2 pallets
    4.2+0.8 = 5 → 1 pick list proposal
    Because the total number of pallets needed to fulfill the order equals to the number of pallets allowed on a pick list proposal, the pick list proposal is not split and only one pick list proposal is created.

17.3. Pick list

The pick list will use the stock details of the proposal it was created from. When the proposal has a batch linked to it, only that batch can be allocated on the pick list. When the proposal has a LUID linked to it, then only that LUID can be allocated on the pick lists.
The locks created for the proposal will be converted to locks for the pick list without changing the locking level.

When the ‘Only pick items on location on same or lower level as dock?’ option is flagged on the Picklist controller, system will check whether there is stock from the proposed batch on the same or lower level location as the destination location (loading dock/input location of the production line). If there is not, no pick list will be generated and the pick list proposal will be closed.

Multiple pick lists

Multiple pick lists will be created for a single document in the following scenarios:

  • Multiple pick list proposals were generated (Please see: Picklist proposal)
  • Proposals were created on different times and the pick list was created before creating the next proposal.

If the document already has a pick list, a new pick list proposal can only be generated when the following verifies:

  • there is at least one document line where the quantity allocated on the existing pick list is less than the ordered quantity
  • there is available stock that can be allocated

Example:
Sales order: ItemA 10 pcs ItemB 10 pcs
The available stock that can be allocated: ItemA 10 pcs ItemB 0pcs

  1. Create pick list proposal:
    Pick list proposal (1) allocates: ItemA 10 pcs
  2. Create pick list:
    Pick list proposal (1) linked to Pick list (1)
    Pick list (1): allocates: ItemA 10 pcs
  3. Create pick list proposal after ItemB with 10 pcs became available:
    Pick list proposal (2) allocates: ItemB 10 pcs (as ItemA is already allocated, it will not be proposed)
  4. Create pick list:
    Pick list proposal (2) linked to Pick list (2)
    Pick list (2): allocates: ItemB 10 pcs

Please note: If the ‘Force all ingredients to be on a proposal before creating a pick list?’ option is set to true on the Picking for production controller, the pick list will be created for a production order only when the total quantity of every material is allocated on the pick list.

17.4. Initiate the picking

Pick list

17.4.1. Picking/ Multi-picking/ Zone-picking

After the pick list has been printed or it has been selected on the scanner, the system will select the location to pick from based on the following checks:

  • Only locations in the selected warehouse are taken into account
  • There is stock of the proposed batch on the location
  • Depending on the settings of the Pick list controller, bulk locations might be taken into account:
    • If the option ‘Can the user pick full pallet from bulk location?’ is flagged and there is a full pallet on the bulk location.
    • If the ‘Must the user first pick full pallet from bulk location?’ option is also flagged, the full pallet on the bulk location will be allocated.
    • If the ‘Can the user pick bulk quantity from bulk location?’ option is set to true, the user can pick bulk quantities from bulk locations.

Stock on the locations that are allowed for picking will be sorted based on the ‘Stock order by’ setting on the Pick list controller, unless the ‘Force the user pick full pallet?’ option is set to true. In this case the user will be forced to pick the full pallet of items which contains the same or a lower quantity than the quantity that has to be picked. If there are still quantity to pick for the item and there are no more full pallets left, then the stock will be allocated based on the ‘Stock order by’ setting.

If there is stock from the proposed batch/LUID on a location from what the user can pick, the status of the pick list will be changed to ‘Ready’. The locks for the pick list will be converted to ‘Detail’ level.

If the 'Picking: Make pick list ready for selected line? (Y/N)' option is enabled on the pick list controller, and the user performs the picking in the Picking flow, then the status of the pick list is changed to ‘Partially Ready’ after an item is selected to pick. Only the corresponding pick list line’ s status is set to ‘Ready’, the other, unpicked lines remain in ‘Not Ready’ status.

If there is no stock of the proposed batch/LUID located on a location from the user can pick , then the status of the pick list will remain ‘Not ready’ and the locks will remain on the batch/LUID level. The user have to select alternate stock on the scanner. Every batch that is allowed to be picked will be listed on the scanner as alternate stock.

After a pick list line has been picked, the locking will be converted to ‘Detail’ level. The status of the line will be changed to ‘Picked’ or ‘Packed’. (based on the pick list type and the picking process.)
If the ‘Always status picked’ option is ticked for the pick list type, the line status will be converted to ‘Picked’ regardless of the picking process. If it is disabled, then the status will be changed to ‘Picked’ when picking onto a moveable location or ‘Packed’ when picking without a moveable location.

17.4.2. Ad hoc picking

The status of the pick list will remain ‘Not Ready’ and the locking level will remain ‘Batch’ or ‘LUID’ after the pick list has been printed or selected on the scanner. The stock that can be picked will always be sorted by:

  • BBD
  • Batch with smallest free stock
  • Pick locations
  • Location with most LUID’s
  • Non-full pallets
  • Smallest quantities per inventory line
  • Location sequence

Please note that bulk locations are only taken into account if the ‘Allow ad hoc picking from bulk locations?’ option is set to true on the Pick list controller.

After a pick list line has been picked, the locking will be converted to ‘Detail’ level. The status of the line will be changed to ‘Picked’ or ‘Packed’ depending on the pick list type and the picking process.

18. Produmex Standard EDI Module

EDI is a communication protocol for electronic data interchange between business partners.

With the Produmex EDI module it is possible to:

  • export files with the Notification Listener or the Interfacing tool,
  • import files with the Interfacing tool and
  • monitor the process on the Interface Monitor screen.

The standard file formats used for EDI messages are .xml and .csv.

18.1. Configuration

18.1.1. Define the path

Define the input and the output path for the EDI module on the Config tab of the Organization Structure.

  1. In the Interface Monitor Input Archive Path field define the path where the system moves the file after processing it.
  2. In the Interface Monitor Input Error Path field define the path where the file is moved if there is an error during the processing.
  3. In the Interface Monitor Input Path field define the path to a folder from where the system imports the file.
  4. In the Interface Monitor Output Archive Path field define the path where the third party software puts the file after processing it.
    Note: This path is not used by the Produmex Interfacing tool.
  5. In the Interface Monitor Output Error Path field define the path where the third party software puts the file if there is an error while processing it.
    Note: This path is not used by the Produmex Interfacing tool.
  6. In the Interface Monitor Output Path field define the path to the folder where the system exports the file. Set this folder as an input for the third party software.

Configuration

18.1.2. Set up the interfacing controller

Produmex offers standard controllers for the following documents:

DocumentPropertyExtension
PMX advance shipping noticeInterface for PMX Advance Shipping Notice (Im-Exporter)IPmx Advance Shipping Notice Interface
PMX move orderInterface for PMX Move Order Im-/ExportIPmx Move Order Interface
PMX move Interface for PMX Move Im-/ExportIPmx Move Interface
SBO item master data Interface for SBO Item Master Data Im-/ExportISBO Item Master Data Interface
SBO purchase credit note Interface for SBO Purchase Credit Note Im-/ExportISBO Purchase Credit Note Interface
SBO purchase delivery Interface for SBO Purchase Delivery Im-/ExportISBO Purchase Delivery Interface
SBO purchase invoice Interface for SBO Purchase Invoice Im-/ExportISBO Purchase Invoice Interface
SBO purchase order Interface for SBO Purchase Order Im-/ExportISBO Purchase Order Interface
SBO purchase return Interface for SBO Purchase Return Im-/ExportISBO Purchase Return Interface
SBO sales credit note Interface for SBO Sales Credit Note Im-/ExportISBO Sales Credit Note Interface
SBO sales delivery Interface for SBO Sales Delivery Note Im-/ExportISBO Sales Delivery Interface
SBO sales invoice Interface for SBO Sales Invoice Im-/ExportISBO Sales Invoice Interface
SBO sales return Interface for SBO Sales Return Im-/ExportISBO Sales Return Interface
SBO sales orderInterface for SBO Sales Order Im-/ExportISBO Sales Order Interface

The following documents have an interface, but they require custom controllers:

DocumentProperty
PMX picklistInterface for PMX Pick List Im-/Export
PMX serial numberInterface for PMX Serial Number Im-/Export
PMX stock QS changeInterface for PMX Stock QS Change Import
PMX stock IPmx Stock Interface – Pmx Stock Im-/Exporter
SBO business partnerInterface for SBO Business Partner Im-/Exporter
SBO goods issueInterface for SBO Goods Issue Im-/Exporter
SBO goods receiptInterface for SBO Goods Receipt Im-/Export
SBO incoming paymentInterface for SBO Incoming Payment Im-/Export
SBO production issueInterface for SBO Production Issue Im-/Export
SBO production receiptInterface for SBO Production Receipt Im-/Export
SBO sales delivery 2Interface for SBO Sales Delivery 2 Im-/Export
SBO sales return 2Interface for SBO Sales Return 2 Im-/Export
SBO whs transferInterface for SBO Whs Transfer Im-/Export

Configuration steps:
1. Select the controller for the necessary document type on the Extension Parameters tab of the Organization Structure.
2. Select the Property and the Extension.
3. Click OK.

Extension Parameters

18.2. Exporting with the Notification Listener tool

The Notification Listener is a tool that monitors the record in the PMX_NOTQ table and performs custom actions when a certain type of data is adjusted. For information on the installation of the Notification Listener see:

To export documents proceed as follows:

1. Locate the configuration file of the Notification Listener tool.

The configuration file is called Produmex.Foundation.SboNotification.ServiceHost.exe.config and it is located in the installation folder of the tool, for example: C:\Program Files(x86)\Produmex\Produmex SB1 Notification Listener.

2. Open the file with a text editor (e.g. Notepad).

3. Locate the line of the transaction and uncomment it.

Example: Proof of delivery route export action defined for the Notification Listener

Notification Listener

4. Save the file.

5. Run the Notification Listener tool.

  • To run the Notification Listener tool in the background, start it from Windows\Control Panel\ Programs and Features\.
  • To run the Notification Listener tool with an open console, launch the RunConsole.bat file from the installation folder of the tool, for example: C:\Program Files(x86)\Produmex\Produmex SB1 Notification Listener\.

18.2.1. Example: exported XML file structure of a sales order

<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<Document>
<DocumentHeader>
	<ObjectType>17</ObjectType>
		<DocumentNumber>15</DocumentNumber>
		<DocumentDate>20120220</DocumentDate>
		<DocumentDueDate>20120220</DocumentDueDate>
		<NumAtCard>7927</NumAtCard>
		<CardCode>C1000</CardCode>
		<CardName>Card name</CardName>
		<BillTo>
			<Street>Lenteakker3</Street>
			<City>SPIJKENISSE</City>
			<ZipCode>3206TB</ZipCode>
			<CountryCode>NL</CountryCode>
			<GLN>5400150100004</GLN>
			<FederalTaxID/>
		</BillTo>
		<ShipTo>
			<Street>Lenteakker 3</Street>
			<City>SPIJKENISSE</City>
			<ZipCode>3206TB</ZipCode>
			<CountryCode>NL</CountryCode>
			<GLN>5400150100004</GLN>
			<FederalTaxID/>
		</ShipTo>
		<DocumentCurrency>EUR</DocumentCurrency>
		<TotalNetto>0</TotalNetto>
		<TotalDiscount>0</TotalDiscount>
		<TotalVAT>0</TotalVAT>
		<TotalBruto>0</TotalBruto>
		<Comments>Comment</Comments>
		<GLN/>
		<FederalTaxID>US25-987634</FederalTaxID>
	</DocumentHeader>
	<DocumentLineList>
		<DocumentLine>
			<BaseDocNum>215</BaseDocNum>
			<BaseLine>0</BaseLine>
			<BaseType>22</BaseType>
			<LineNumber>0</LineNumber>
			<ItemCode>CIA00092</ItemCode>
			<ItemDescription>CIMZIA 200MG/ML 2PFS AT/NL</ItemDescription>
			<Uom>Pcs</Uom>
			<Quantity>1</Quantity>
			<UnitPrice>0</UnitPrice>
			<DiscountPercent>0</DiscountPercent>
			<LineTotal>0</LineTotal>
			<VATCode>6</VATCode>
			<VATPercent>6</VATPercent>
			<LineVAT>0</LineVAT>
			<WarehouseCode>01</WarehouseCode>
			<PmxDocumentLineList>
				<PmxDocumentLine>
					<Quantity>1</Quantity>
					<Uom>Pcs</Uom>
					<QualityStatusCode>RELEASED</QualityStatusCode>
					<SSCC>123456789012345678</SSCC>
					<StorageLocationCode>A01</StorageLocationCode>
					<BatchNumber>BATCH1</BatchNumber>
					<BatchNumber2/>
					<ExpiryDate>20160908</ExpiryDate>
				</PmxDocumentLine>
				<PmxDocumentLine>
					<Quantity>1</Quantity>
					<Uom>Pcs</Uom>
					<QualityStatusCode>RELEASED</QualityStatusCode>
					<SSCC>123456789012345680</SSCC>
					<StorageLocationCode>PIC01</StorageLocationCode>
					<BatchNumber>BATCH1</BatchNumber>
					<BatchNumber2/>
					<ExpiryDate>20160908</ExpiryDate>
				</PmxDocumentLine>
			</PmxDocumentLineList>
		</DocumentLine>
	</DocumentLineList>
</Document>

18.2.2. Example: exported CSV file structure of proof of delivery (exported route)

R,202,This is the route description,20160724
J,D,10,C00001,Customer name 1,Address line 1,Address line 2,,,,,
I,S,10,000000000000092241
I,S,10,000000000000092395
I,S,10,000000000000092289
J,D,20,C00002,Customer name 2,Address line 1,Address line 2,Address line 3,Address line 4,,,
I,S,20,000000000000093699
I,S,20,000000000000093651

18.3. Importing and exporting with the Interfacing tool

With the Interfacing tool certain documents can be imported to and exported from the system. This application is installed during the Produmex Tools installation (see 3.2. Install components).

18.3.1. Preparing documents for import

The following table shows the prefixes, the extensions and the object types to be used while preparing documents for import. The table lists documents with standard controllers.

Document Type Prefix Extension Object type
Purchase order OPOR_ xml 22
Purchase delivery OPDN_ xml 20
Purchase invoice OPCH_ xml 18
Purchase credit note ORPC_ xml 19
Purchase return ORPD_ xml 21
Sales order ORDR_ xml 17
Sales delivery ODLN_ xml 15
Sales invoice OINV_ xml 13
Sales credit note ORIN_ xml 14
Sales return ORDN_ xml 16
Proof of delivery EPOD_ csv POD_RTHE
Advance shipping notice* N/Acsv18 or 22
Move* PMX_MV_ csv N/A
Move order* PMX_MO_ csv N/A

*See section 18.3.3.Templates for importing.

18.3.2. Running the Interfacing tool

The tool is located in the installation folder of the Produmex Tools, for example: C:\Program Files\Produmex \Produmex Tools\ and the file name is Produmex.Sbo.Logex.Tools.InterfacingTool.exe.

Start the interfacing tool with startup parameters. The following command line parameters are supported:

  • /cs: Contains the connection string that should be used. Default value: 'SboConnectionString'
  • /t: Defines the type of the interface. Possible values:
    • salesorder
    • salesdelivery
    • salesinvoice
    • salescreditnote
    • salesreturn
    • purchaseorder
    • purchasedelivery
    • purchaseinvoice
    • purchasecreditnote
    • purchasereturn
    • productionissue
    • productionreceipt
    • advanceshippingnotice
    • itemmasterdata
    • incomingpayment
    • move
    • moveorder
    • stock
    • stockqschange
    • businesspartnermasterdata
    • warehouseautomation
    • POD
      Default value: ‘stock’
  • /d: Defines the direction of the interface. Possible values:
    • import
    • export
      Default value: ‘export’.
  • /rf: If added, the system reprocesses failed actions.

Example: Produmex.Sbo.Logex.Tools.InterfacingTool.exe /cs:SboConnectionString /t:move /d:import

Note: It is recommended to run the interfacing tool as a scheduled task.

18.3.3. Templates for importing

18.3.3.1. Move and move order template for importing

1. For moves/move orders create a csv. file with the following fields:

  • FromPmxWhsCode: the code of the source warehouse
  • ToPmxWhsCode: the code of the destination warehouse
  • ItemCode: the item code of the product
  • Quantity: quantity to move or to make a move order from
  • Serialnumber: If the item is managed by serial numbers, add the serial number here.
  • SrcQualityStatusCode: the quality status of the stock that should be moved
  • DestQualityStatusCode: the quality status that the stock should get after the move
  • Batchnumber: If the item is managed by batches, add the batch number here.
  • InternalBatchnumber: If the item has a second batch number, add it here.
  • BestBeforeDate: If the item has a best before date, add it here.
  • SrcStorLocCode: the code of the source storage location
  • DestStorLocCode: the code of the destination storage location
  • SrcLogUnitIdentKey: the source LUID
  • DestLogUnitIdentKey: the destination LUID

Note: The field names are case sensitive.

2. Save the file as a .csv file.

Naming convention: Use the PMX_MO_ prefix for move order templates and the PMX_MV_ prefix for move templates. The system checks the file name to determine whether a move order or a move should be created.

Example:

  • Move order: PMX_MO_07032012.csv
  • Move: PMX_MV_07032012.csv
18.3.3.2. ASN template for importing

With the Interfacing Tool goods that are received against purchase orders or purchase invoices can be imported from CSV files to SAP B1. As a result of the import, the system generates open ASN lines, which you can use to create goods receipt PO documents.

To implement the import process, proceed as follows.

1. Prepare the CSV file with the 14 columns listed in the table below and provide the necessary data.
Make sure that you list all the 14 columns, keep the column names and the order of the columns as indicated in the table.

  • Alternatively, the ASN template can be used, which is available in your installation folder (Templates > Import Templates folder).
Field name (case sensitive)Description/Activity
ObjType In case of a purchase order the value of the field should be 22 while in case of a purchase invoice it should be 18.
Note: If no value is added to the field, the system automatically considers the object type a purchase order.
DocNum Add the document number of the purchase order/purchase invoice.
LineNum and ItemCode It is not mandatory to provide a value for both fields. You can provide only the line number, which you can check in SAP B1. If you provide only the item code, the system uses this value to find the line number.
Note: If the purchase order contains two or more lines with the same item code, the system cannot find the correct line number. In this case you need to provide a value for the line number as well.
Quantity Add the inventory quantity of the item to be received. If you provide value to the SerialNumber column, the value of the Quantity should be 1.
SSCC Add the SSCC of the logistic unit if there is any.
MasterSSCC Add the SSCC number of the master logistic unit if there is any.
Batch If the item is managed by batches, add the batch number in this column.
Batch2 Add the second batch number of the product if there is any.
BBD Add the best before date of the product if there is any.
SerialNumber Add the serial number of the product if there is any.
UF1 User information - optional
UF2 User information - optional
UF3 User information - optional

Example of a CSV file:

ObjType;DocNum;LineNum;ItemCode;Quantity;SSCC;MasterSSCC;Batch;Batch2;BBD;SerialNumber;UF1;UF2;UF3
22;123;0;ITEM01;10;123456789012345678;;BATCHA;;20200131;;User info 1;;
22;123;1;SERIAL01;1;123456789012345678;;BATCHA;;20200131;SER01;User info 1;;
22;123;1;SERIAL01;1;123456789012345678;;BATCHA;;20200131;SER02;User info 1;;

2. Save your CSV file to the folder defined in the Interface Monitor Input Path.

3. Run the Interfacing Tool.

4. You can check the imported data in SAP B1 by navigating to Produmex > Purchasing > ASN. The system displays the Open ASN Lines screen (see 6.3.2. Open ASN lines).

5. Now you can create goods receipt PO documents from the open ASN Lines (see 28.6. ASN Reception).

18.4. Monitoring EDI messages

EDI messages can be monitored on the Interface Monitor screen. The function is available by navigating to Produmex > Interfacing > Interface Monitor.

Interface Monitor

The list of the interfacing messages can be monitored with the following filters:

  • Type of message: the document type
  • Status: the status of the entry
    • Possible values are: All, Error, New, Processed
  • Text filter: Only those lines get listed which contain the text added to the field.
  • From - To: The lines get listed based on the defined period.

Click on the Refresh button to apply the filters.

To see more information about a message, select its line.

Click on the Log button to see the log entry. If the status of an entry is Error, the error message can be seen here.

The Reprocess button is active if the status is Error.

The Show file button is active if the status is Error and the direction is Import.

To correct a failed import proceed as follows:

  1. select the entry line,
  2. click on the Show file button,
  3. correct the file and save it,
  4. click on the Reprocess button to process the file again.

Performing the Picking Process

Picklists can be created from Sales Orders, Sales Reserve Invoices, Inventory Transfer Requests (if the source warehouse is a Produmex warehouse) and Production Orders.

When picklists are generated on the office level, they are immediately available on the shop floor. The picking process can be performed on the Mobile Client (scanner mode) by starting the picking flows listed below. Consult with the description of the flows and click on the name of the given flow to see its documentation.

Note: The production picking functions are documented in the Production Guide.

Picking Flows

1. Picking Flow:

  • The picking process is based on a single picklist or waves containing picklists for different customers and you are suggested to pick the allocated stock.
  • When picking for a single customer / delivery address, you can create a packed logistic unit directly. When picking for a wave containing different customers, you must use a movable location and after finishing the picking, a packing process must be performed.

2. Multi-Picking Flow:

  • The picking process is based on a single picklist or a wave. The flow is designed to use waves containing picklists for different customers, but the picking process can be performed for a single picklist as well. You are suggested to pick the allocated stock.
  • The flow always requires the use of a movable location and each picklist must be picked to a specific movable location.
  • After finishing the picking, a packing process must be performed.

3. Zone Picking Flow:

  • The picking process is based on a single picklist or waves containing picklists for different customers.
  • After selecting a picklist on the scanner, a zone must be selected. The flow proceeds with the step of selecting the items to pick, but only those items are listed that can be found in the selected zone. You are suggested to pick the allocated stock.
  • When picking for a single customer / delivery address, you can create a packed logistic unit directly. When picking for a wave containing different customers, you must use a movable location and after finishing the picking, a packing process must be performed.

4. Ad Hoc Picking Flow:

  • The input of the picking can be a single picklist or a route.
  • There is no stock allocated for the picking process, that is, you can select the available free items.
  • The flow supports the use of movable locations.
  • When the Ad Hoc Picking flow is started, the following picking tasks can be selected:
    • Customer Collect: The input of the picking is a single customer collect picklist. When a customer is coming to the warehouse to make a request and the picking process is performed, the customer must confirm that all the needed items are picked and loaded into the customer’s vehicle.
    • Picklist: A picklist must be selected during the flow. There is no customer confirmation step.
    • Route: A route must be selected during the flow. There is no customer confirmation step.

5. Box Pick and Pack Flow:

  • With the flow it is possible to perform the picking process directly into boxes on a cart. The flow is based on a single picklist or a wave containing picklists for different customers.
  • If a full SSCC is picked, the system keeps the existing SSCC number. If not, the system generates an SSCC number when the first item is picked.
  • The process always requires the use of a movable location. When the picking process is completed for the wave, the Unload Movable Locations to Dock Flow can be started on the Mobile Client to unload the movable locations to the dock.

6. Prepare Carts Flow:

  • The flow prepares carton boxes for the Multi-Picking Flow. It can be used for orders where items can be picked into one or more carton boxes (or logistic carriers) in which the items will be shipped.
  • The flow is based on a wave with one or more picklists and (with custom development) it is possible to assign more than one carton box and more than one movable location to each picklist in the selected wave.
  • During the flow an SSCC number is added to each carton box. The SSCC number can be preprinted or can be created during the flow.
  • With the end of the flow the Multi-Picking Flow can be started to pick the necessary items into the carton boxes. With the SSCC numbers added to the boxes in the Prepare Carts Flow, it is defined which items should be picked into which carton box.
  • The carton boxes are the final destinations of the items and no packing process is needed. With the end of the Multi-Picking Flow, the stock can go through the necessary shipping flow.
    Note: If a packing step is needed to double-check the content of the box, the Consolidated Packing Flow can be used and it can only fully confirm the content or reject it.

7. Zone Box Picking Flow:

  • With the Zone Box Picking Flow on the Mobile Client, it is possible to select specific zones in the warehouse and perform the picking process directly into boxes on a cart. The flow is based on a single picklist or a wave containing picklists for multiple customers. If a full SSCC is picked, the system keeps the existing SSCC number, otherwise the system generates an SSCC number when the first item is picked.
  • The process always requires the use of a movable location. When the picking process is completed for the wave, the Unload Movable Locations to Dock Flow can be started on the Mobile Client to unload the movable locations to the dock.

8. Undo Picking Flow:

  • With the flow goods can be removed from a picked or packed logistic unit and can be moved back to the warehouse. With the end of the flow the corresponding picklist lines are closed and you cannot redo the picking unless you create a new picklist.

19.1. Picking

19.1.1. Select a wave

Select a wave from the list.
When there is no custom wave description added on the pick list controller, the following information is displayed for waves:

  • Wave number
  • Customer card code and name
  • Shipping address

If the wave contains pick lists for multiple customers, then the following information is displayed by default:

  • [number of the pick list proposal] pick list number

The sorting of the pick lists is based on the ‘Wave order by’ setting on the pick list controller.

Pick lists will be listed if the following verifies:

  • The status is ’Not Ready’, ’Ready’, ’Partially Ready’ or ’Partially Picked’
  • The pick list is not customer collect
  • The ‘Use for Production?’ option is not enabled for the pick list type
  • Stock locking for pick lists is not disabled on the General Settings tab of the OSE
  • The ‘Use for picking’ option is checked for the pick list type

In case you have defined the name of your customized view on the Picklist controller (see section Picking/Multi-picking), the pick lists will be filtered on the basis of your view settings and those waves will be listed which meet the criteria defined in your view settings.

After the wave has been selected, all pick lists in the wave with the status ‘Not Ready’ or ‘Partially Ready’ will be converted to ‘Ready’ status. If the Picking: Make pick list ready for selected line? (Y/N) option is enabled on the pick list controller, then the system does not change the pick list status until a pick list line is selected. For more information about pick list statuses and inventory locks please see: Stock allocation algorithm

When the ‘Auto select the wave?’ option is set to true on the pick list controller, the system will automatically select the wave and only that wave will be shown on the screen.
When a wave is stared, it will be locked for the user.

Select a Wave

19.1.2. Remarks

If Pick and Pack remarks were added to the pick lists belonging to the selected wave, the remarks will be shown after the wave selection. Press the Ok button to acknowledge the remark.

Remarks

19.1.3. Select item to pick

Select the item to pick. Items from the pick list with open quantity are listed on the screen.
The items to pick are sorted based on the ’Pick items order by’ setting on the pick list controller. Displayed information:

  • Source location
  • Quantity to pick
  • Item code - description - barcode
  • SSCC number
  • Batch number
  • Best Before Date

If the 'Allow to select the item to pick?' setting is not enabled on the pick list controller, the system will automatically start the picking with the first item on the list.

If the 'Picking: Make pick list ready for selected line? (Y/N)' option is enabled on the pick list controller, the status of the line is only set to ‘Ready’ and the system only allocates stock for the line after the item on the line is selected on the scanner. The status of the other pick list lines is not changed until the user selects the item on the pick list line.

Note: Picklists use item description based on Item Master Data. If the item description is changed on sales orders, the change is not reflected on the Mobile Client, but on the delivery notes.

Select item

19.1.4. Identify moveable location

To pick onto a moveable location, scan it or select it form a list after pressing the Select moveable location button. For more information please see: 4.2. With moveable location

To pick without a moveable location, press the No moveable location button. For more information please see: 4.3. Without moveable location

To pick onto an existing logistic unit, press the Enter SSCC button. For more information please see: 4.4. Picking onto an existing logistic unit

If the wave is for multiple customers, the user is forced to pick onto a moveable location. The No moveable location and the Enter SSCC button is not shown on the screen.

Moveable location

19.1.4.1. No moveable location defined for the warehouse

If there is no moveable location defined in the warehouse, the system displays this screen instead.

To scan an existing SSCC, press the Enter SSCC button.
To create a new SSCC, press the New SSCC button.

Select task

19.1.4.2. With moveable location

Scan the moveable location or select it from a list after pressing the Select moveable location button.
The moveable location will be automatically selected if the ‘Auto selection of moveable location during picking?’ option is set to true on the pick list controller.
Picking onto a moveable location allows the operator to pick multiple orders and pack them onto a logistic carrier at another location (packing station). After the picking has been completed, the status of the pick list will be converted to ’Picked’. The stock will be ready for shipping after it went through the packing process.

19.1.4.3. Without a moveable location

Press the No moveable location button to proceed without a moveable location.
When no moveable location is used during the picking, the status of the pick list will be converted to ‘Packed’ automatically after the picking was completed, except when the option ‘Always status picked?’ is set to true for the pick list type.

19.1.4.3.1. Select an existing logistic unit

When there is a picked logistic unit with an open pick list for the same customer and ship to address, the system will ask whether to continue the picking onto an existing logistic unit or start a new one.

By default only the open logistic units on the same loading dock and for the same customer are listed. When the ‘Allow multiple customers on SSCC?’ option is set to true on the pick list controller, logistic units for other customers are listed too.

Scan the SSCC of an existing logistic unit or press the New logistic unit button to pick onto a new logistic unit.

If the ‘Only pick on 1 SSCC?’ option is enabled on the pick list controller and there are already items picked for the given pick list, then the system automatically selects the last logistic unit started for the pick list and skips the screen.

19.1.4.3.2. Select a logistic carrier

When starting a new logistic unit for the picking, the system will ask whether to pick onto a logistic carrier or not.
Scan the logistic carrier or select it from the list. To proceed without a logistic carrier press the No logistic carrier button.

If there is no free stock of logistic carriers the system will automatically skip this screen.

19.1.4.4. Picking onto an existing logistic unit

When the ‘Allow to identify the SSCC to pick on?’ option is set to true on the pick list controller, an additional ‘Enter SSCC’ button is displayed on the screen. Press this button to identify the SSCC to pick on. On the next screen scan the SSCC.

Identify SSCC

19.1.5. Identify pick location/source SSCC

On the next screen identify the pick location or the source SSCC.

19.1.5.1. Identify pick location

Scan the location code or select the location from a list after pressing the Select location button. Only the proposed location can be selected.

Press the Other tasks’ button to select another moveable location, to select alternate stock, to skip the item or to start a new logistic unit.

When the ‘Skip screen to identify the pick location? (Y/N)’ option is set to true on the pick list controller, the system will automatically proceed with the allocated pick location and goes to the Scan a product screen. Please see: 6. Identify product

Identify pick location

19.1.5.2. Scan an SSCC

The system will ask the user to scan the SSCC in the following scenarios:

  1. The ‘Force the user to pick full pallet?’ option is set to true on the pick list controller and the stock that needs to be picked is on a full pallet.
  2. The ‘Item picking: Force user to scan SSCC when stock is on SSCC?’ option is set to true on the pick list controller.

On the lower part of the screen the details of the product to pick is displayed:

  • Location code
  • Quantity to pick (uom)
  • Item code, description and barcode
  • Batch number
  • Best Before Date
  • SSCC number/Total quantity to pick

Only the proposed SSCC can be scanned otherwise the system will show an error message.

Scan SSCC

19.1.5.3. Other tasks

Press the Other mov .loc. button to continue the picking onto another moveable location.

When there is insufficient stock from the proposed item, batch or best before date, press the Alternate stock button. The system will show the alternatives the operator can pick.

If the Force first available batch on selecting alternate item? (Y/N) is set to true on the Picklist controller(section All, except Ad hoc picking), you can select an item only from the batch with the earliest expiry date that meets the shelf-life requirements.

When the total number of the item cannot be picked, press the Skip item button.

Task

If not picking onto a moveable location, instead of the Other mov. loc. button a Logistic unit is full button is displayed. The button is only visible if there already are items picked on to the logistic unit.
Press this button to finish the logistic unit and continue the picking onto another.

Task

19.1.5.3.1. Logistic unit is full

After pressing the Logistic unit is full button, confirm that the logistic unit is full.

Press No to proceed the picking onto the same logistic unit.

Press Yes to continue the picking onto another logistic unit. The logistic label will be printed. See: 9. Labels printed.
Then select a new logistic unit to continue picking the remaining number of items.

Logistic unit full

19.1.5.3.1.1. Capture weight

If the ‘Ask weight?’ or ‘Ask weight Sub SSCC?’ option is set to true on the Produmex pick list types user table for the pick list, and there is a scale defined under the shipping dock/packing line, the weight of the logistic unit can be measured on the connected scale after the logistic unit is finished.

Make sure that conversions between the units of measurements are set up correctly on the Units of Measure - Setup (OUOM) and Weight - Setup (OWGT) SBO standard tables.

  1. The measured weight. The UoM is the UoM defined for the scale. The number of decimals displayed depends on the scale accuracy.
    This field is automatically filled with the weight measured on the connected scale. It is possible to manually overwrite the measured weight.
    If the weight is manually added or the connection to the scale is lost, the value starts flickering in red.
  2. If the scale has a defined zero command, the ‘Zero’ button is displayed.
  3. If the scale has a defined tare command, the ‘Tare’ button is displayed.
  4. The code of the connected scale.
  5. If there are more than one scales defined under the dock/packing line, an additional Switch scale button is displayed on the screen. Tap this button to change the scale.
    On the next screen select the scale from the list. Every scale defined under the dock/packing line is listed. After switching the scale, the screen will use the chosen scale. After proceeding with the flow, and a new weight needs to be captured, the standard logic to choose a scale is used. This means that switching scale only switches the scale for the current weighing.
  6. SSCC number of the logistic unit.
  7. Theoretical weight: The theoretical weight is the sum of the weight of the items on the logistic unit. The item weight can be defined on the Sales tab of the Item Master Data.
  8. In the case of master SSCC’s, an additional Sub SSCC’s weight value is shown. The value is calculated as the sum of the measured weight of the Sub SSCC’s.
19.1.5.3.1.2. Enter dimensions

If the Ask weight?/ Ask weight Sub SSCC? option is enabled for the pick list type, and there is no scale defined under the shipping dock/packing line, the user has to enter the weight of the (sub) logistic unit after it is finished. The data will be stored on the PMX_LUID table. The unit of measure is the Default Weight UoM set on the Display tab of General Settings.

Based on the pick list type settings, the user might have to enter the dimension(s) of the (sub) logistic unit after it is finished.

When there are package dimensions defined on the Package Dimensions table, the user can select a predefined dimension instead of entering the length, the width and the height manually. The ’Select a package’ screen opens. On this screen every package dimension that is not cancelled is listed. Select a dimension from the list or tap the Enter dimensions manually button.

When the Enter dimensions manually button is tapped or there are no package dimensions defined, the user has to enter the dimensions manually.

  • If the Ask length?/ Ask length Sub SSCC? option is enabled for the pick list type, the user has to enter the length of the (sub) logistic unit after the it is finished.
  • If the Ask width?/ Ask width Sub SSCC? option is enabled for the pick list type, the user has to enter the width of the (sub) logistic unit after the it is finished.
  • If the Ask height?/ Ask height Sub SSCC? option is enabled for the pick list type, the user has to enter the height of the (sub) logistic unit after the it is finished.

The data will be stored on the PMX_LUID table. The unit of measure is the Default Length UoM set on the Display tab of General Settings.

19.1.5.3.2. Alternate stock

After pressing the Alternate stock button, the system will propose alternate items to pick. All stock that can be allocated for the pick list will be listed. Displayed information:

  • Pick location
  • Quantity to pick
  • Item code, description and barcode
  • Batch number
  • Best Before Date
  • SSCC information

Select an item to pick and continue with the process.

When the ‘Alternate: Show locked quantity for current line?’ option is enabled on the pick list controller, the item that was locked for the pick list is also displayed on the list of alternate items.

When the ‘Copy batch number when selecting alternate item?’ option is enabled on the pick list controller, the system will copy the original proposed batch number to the selected alternate stock.

If the Ad hoc alternate item? option is enabled on the picklist controller, the system returns to the Scan an SSCC screen instead of suggesting alternate stock.
You need to go through all the steps of stock identification. You can scan or select anything, but in the background the system validates the entered values. The system proceeds only if the identified stock is existing and can be used for picking.

If the stock is on SSCCs, you can only scan SSCC on the Scan alternate SSCC or location screen. If you do not use any SSCC, you can scan a location.

Scan alternate SSCC or location

19.1.5.3.3. Skip item

After pressing the Skip item button, select a reason why the full quantity cannot be picked. Every reason that can be used for picking will be listed.

Skip item

19.1.6. Identify product

Scan the product or select a product from a list after pressing the Select a product button. Every item on the pick location is listed.
When the ‘Disable selection of items’ option is set to true on the pick list controller, the item cannot be selected.

Displayed information:

  • Pick location
  • Quantity to pick
  • Item code, description, barcode
  • Batch number
  • Best Before Date
  • Total quantity to pick (sum of the open quantities of every item on the sales order)
  • SSCC number

Identify product

19.1.6.1. Select a batch number

When there are more than one batch of the item on the pick location, it has to be verified that the right batch is picked. When the product has been identified by scanning, the system will check that whether the batch and best before date information are included in the barcode. If it is, the system will automatically proceed with that batch and best before date and skips this screen.

Select the batch from the list. The following information is displayed on the screen:

  • Batch number
  • Second batch number
  • Best Before Date
  • Quality status.

Only the allocated batch can be selected.

If the ‘Auto select batch/BBD on picking?‘ option is set to true on the pick list controller, the system will automatically select the batch and will skip the screen automatically.

Select batch

19.1.7. Add quantity

After the product to pick has been identified, add the quantity to pick. For more information about the quantity adding screens see: Screens for entering additional information.

The number of the picked items can be modified, however there is a maximum limit:

  • When the quantity to pick is greater than the available quantity on the pick location, the operator cannot pick more than the available quantity.
  • When the quantity to pick is less than the available quantity on the pick location, the maximum limit is the open quantity to pick, unless the ‘Allow over picking’ option is set to true on the General settings tab.

Add quantity

19.1.8. Items are picked

When the quantity to pick is defined, the picking of the item is concluded. The system displays the message:

Items picked

Tap on the OK button.

Note: With setting Time to show ‘item is picked’ message? on the pick list controller you can set the number of seconds during which time the Items are picked screen is shown or you can skip the screen.

Next step:

  • If there is no more item to pick, the system prints the logistic label (see section 9. Labels printed).
  • If the full quantity of the selected item is picked and the 204 - Picking: after item is picked print event is set for the picklist type, the system asks if you want to print a label. To proceed with the printing click OK.
    Note: If the print event is set, it is triggered when picking an SSCC and also when picking on a movable location. As the default layout for the print event is based on picking SSCC, it is recommended to create a new layout or customize the default one when picking on a movable location.

Pick list status:

  • If there is no more item to pick and you have picked onto a moveable location or setting Always status picked? is set to true for the pick list type on the Produmex Pick List Type UDT, the status of the pick list is converted to Picked. Otherwise, the status of the pick list is converted to Packed.
  • If the status of the pick list is Packed and the Automatic shipping is set for the item on the sales order, the item is automatically shipped and the sales/inventory delivery is created.

19.1.9. Labels printed

After a pick list or a logistic unit is finished, the logistic label will be printed.
Displayed information:

  • Loading dock code
  • SSCC number
  • Customer code and name

Press Yes to reprint the label.
Press No to proceed with the picking.

Label printed

19.1.10. Count colli

When the ‘Count colli after picking’ checkbox is ticked on the ‘General’ tab of the Organizational Structure, a further check is applied in the end of the picking.

Enter the right number of the picked colli. The count is done in the inventory UoM.

Count colli

The number of the reties can be configured on the General settings too. If the operator enters the wrong number, the system issues a warning and displays the number of the remaining retries.

If the operator exceeds the number of retry attempts, the system closes the pick list and generates a new one for the sales order in question. (Because the pick list is closed, the locking will be removed from the stock.) The system also instructs the operator to move the picked items back.

Count colli

If there is ‘Location after incorrect count’ defined on the ‘General Settings’ tab of the Organizational Structure, the system will move the picked items to that location.
If there is no location after incorrect count defined, the picked stock will remain on the dock.

Count colli

19.2. Multi-Picking flow

19.2.1. Scan the picklist number

Scan the picklist number. A picklist can be scanned if the following verifies:

  • The status of the pick list is status ‘Not Ready’, ‘Partially Ready’, ‘Ready’ or ‘Partially Picked’
  • The ‘Use for Production?’ option is not enabled for the pick list type

After the user scanned the pick list, the system identifies the wave.

If the ‘Use for multi picking’ option is not set for the pick list type of the pick list, it cannot be picked in the multi picking flow. When picking a wave that contains such pick lists, the user has to scan these pick list among the other pick lists, but these pick list will not be taken into account when the system list the items to pick.

If the ’Multi picking: Allow to select wave?’ option is enabled on the Pick List Controller, the wave can be selected from a list.

Scan pick list

19.2.2. Identify moveable location

Identify the moveable location. Only moveable locations from the same warehouse as the pick list can be scanned. The scanned moveable location will be assigned to the pick list. One moveable location can only have one pick list assigned.

Displayed information:

  • Scanned pick list number
  • Moveable location code (if the pick list already has an assigned moveable location

If the ‘Multi picking: Set movable location at start of picking? (Y/N)’ option is set to true on the pick list controller, the system identifies the wave after the first pick list is scanned and automatically proceeds to the Select item to pick screen.
The moveable location will be assigned to the pick list after the first item from the pick list is picked.

Moveable location

19.2.2.1. Scan the next pick list (wave with multiple pick list)

Scan the next pick list number. A pick list can be scanned if it is in the same wave as the first scanned pick list.

Displayed information:

  • The sequence number/Number of pick list in the wave. Only pick list in the wave can be scanned.

Scan next

19.2.2.2. Scan the next pick list (new wave)

Scan the next pick list number or press the Done button to start picking the scanned pick lists.
A pick list can be scanned if it is linked to the same warehouse as the first scanned pick list.

Displayed information:

  • The sequence number of the pick list. There is no limit for the number of pick lists.

Scan next

19.2.3. Remarks

If Pick and Pack remarks were added to the pick lists, the remarks will be shown after pressing the Done button or scanning every pick list. Press the Ok button to acknowledge the remark.

Remarks

19.2.4. Select item to pick

After pressing the Done button, or after scanning every pick list in the wave, the list of the items to pick is displayed. Every item from the scanned pick lists that is not yet picked is listed.

Displayed information:

  • Proposed pick location
  • Quantity to pick
  • Item code – description – barcode
  • SSCC number
  • Batch number
  • Best Before Date

If the ’Allow to select the item to pick?’ setting is not enabled on the pick list controller, the system will automatically start the picking with the first item on the list.

Select item

19.2.5. Identify pick location

On the bottom of the screen the picking data is displayed:

  • Pick location
  • Quantity to pick
  • Item code - description - barcode
  • Batch number
  • Best Before Date
  • SSCC number
  • Total quantity to pick

Scan the pick location or select it from a list after pressing the Select location button.

To perform other tasks, press the Other tasks button.

When the ‘Skip screen to identify the pick location? (Y/N)’ option is set to true on the pick list controller, the system will automatically proceed with the allocated pick location and goes to the Scan a product screen. Please see: 7. Identify product

ick location

19.2.5.1. Other tasks

Press the Other tasks button to perform the following actions:

Other task

19.2.6. Identify a product

Scan the product or select a product from a list after pressing the Select a product button. Every item on the pick location is listed.
When the ‘Disable selection of items’ option is set to true on the pick list controller, the item cannot be selected.

Displayed information:

  • Pick location
  • Quantity to pick
  • Item code, description, barcode
  • Batch number
  • Best Before Date
  • Total quantity to pick (sum of the open quantities of every item on the sales order)
  • SSCC number

Identify product

19.1.6.1. Select a batch number

When there are more than one batch of the item on the pick location, it has to be verified that the right batch is picked. When the product has been identified by scanning, the system will check that whether the batch and best before date information are included in the barcode. If it is, the system will automatically proceed with that batch and best before date and skips this screen.

Select the batch from the list. The following information is displayed on the screen:

  • Batch number
  • Second batch number
  • Best Before Date
  • Quality status.

Only the allocated batch can be selected.

If the ‘Auto select batch/BBD on picking?‘ option is set to true on the pick list controller, the system will automatically select the batch and will skip the screen automatically.

Select batch

19.2.7. Add quantity

After the product to pick has been identified, add the quantity to pick. For more information about the quantity adding screens see: Screens for entering additional information.

The number of the picked items can be modified, however there is a maximum limit:

  • When the quantity to pick is greater than the available quantity on the pick location, the operator cannot pick more than the available quantity.
  • When the quantity to pick is less than the available quantity on the pick location, the maximum limit is the open quantity to pick, unless the ‘Allow over picking’ option is set to true on the General settings tab.

Add quantity

19.2.8. Identify movable location or destination SSCC

19.2.8.1 Identify movable location

Identify the movable location to pick onto. Only the movable location assigned to the picklist can be scanned or selected.

On the bottom of the screen the following information is displayed:

  • Code of the movable location
  • Quantity to pick
  • Item code – description – barcode
  • SSCC number
  • Total quantity to pick

Moveable location

19.2.8.2 Identify the destination SSCC

In case there is an SSCC assigned in the Prepare carts flow, at this point you can scan the destination SSCC so that you can make sure that the items are in the right box.

On the screen you can see the SSCC number to be scanned and the movable location is also displayed.

With this step the status of the items becomes packed. You can start a Consolidated packing flow to double check the content of the boxes or the stock can go a through a shipping process immediately.

It is possible, through custom development, that multiple boxes are prepared for one pick list. If there are multiple boxes and it is not exactly defined what needs to be stored in which box, you will see a list of SSCC’s on the screen and you need to scan one of them.

19.2.9. Items are picked

After every item was picked, the system goes back to the ‘Scan the pick list number’ screen.

Because in the multi-picking flow it is mandatory to pick onto a moveable location, the status of the pick list after the picking will always be ‘Picked’ and the stock has to go through packing before it can be shipped.

Item picked

19.3. Prepare Carts Flow

The Prepare Carts flow can be used for orders where items can be picked into one or more carton boxes in which the items will be shipped.
The flow is based on a wave and makes it possible to assign more than one carton box and more than one movable location to each pick list in the selected wave. Besides, during the flow an SSCC number is added to each carton box.
Prepare Carts configuration: Configuration Guide / 5.1.3.44. Picklist controller / Prepare carts

The flow prepares the carton boxes for the Multi-picking flow. With the end of the Prepare Carts flow the operator needs to start a multi-picking flow to pick the items into the carton boxes. Due to the SSCC numbers added to the boxes in the Prepare Carts flow, the operator will know which items should be picked into which carton box.

As the carton boxes are the final destinations of the items, no packing process is needed. When the operator finishes the multi-picking flow, the stock can go through the necessary shipping flow. If a packing step is needed to double check the content of the box, the setting Always pick to status picked on the pick list type needs to be enabled (SAP Tools > Default forms > Produmex pick list types (PMX_PLTY)). This will allow users to perform a packing step to double check the content in a Consolidated packing flow (keeping SSCC number). That packing step can only fully confirm the content or reject it.

Bild1553511141651

Picklist proposalPicklistSelect a waveSelect a picklistSelect a logistic carrierScan an SSCCSelect a movable locationSelect another logistic carrier and movable locationSelect another picklistWave has been preparedMulti-picking

To start the flow, press the Sales button on your fat client, then select Prepare Carts.

19.3.1. Select a wave

Select a wave from the list.

The order of the pick lists is based on the Wave-order by setting on the picklist controller.

When there is no custom wave description added on the pick list controller, the following information is displayed about the waves:

  • Wave number
  • Customer card code and name
  • Shipping address

If the wave contains pick lists for multiple customers, the fat client displays the numbers of the picklist proposals on the left-hand side and the wave number on the right-hand side.

Select a wave

19.3.2. Select a picklist

Select a picklist from the list.

The order of the picklists is based on the Pick list–Order by setting on the picklist controller.

The picklists belonging to the selected wave will be listed if they have not been prepared yet, or if there is no movable location assigned to them.

Select a picklist

19.3.3. Select a logistic carrier

Select a logistic carrier (carton box or pallet) by scanning the necessary barcode. (Barcodes are defined in the Item Master Data).

Alternatively, you can tap Select item and select the appropiate logistic carrier from the list.

Tap No logistic carrier if you do not use any logistic carrier or logistic carriers are not recorded in the system.

Select a logistic carrier

In case you scan the wrong barcode, you will see the following message:

Error message

19.3.4. Scan an SSCC

Scan the SSCC number of the logistic carrier if it already exists or tap New SSCC and the system will generate a new one.

In case you wish to use the New SSCC option, please make sure that in the Organizational structure settings:

  1. you add the DefaultPickingPrepareCartNewSSCCLabel report to your report list (see Configuration Guide / 5.1.5. Reports) and
  2. you set up the print event of Picking: Prepare cart: New SSCC created (see Configuration Guide / 5.1.6. Print events).

Error message

19.3.5. Select a movable location

Select a movable location.

Only those movable locations can be selected which are not assigned to picklists with status Not ready, Partially ready, Ready, Partially Picked.

On the screen you will see the SSCC number as well.

Select a movable location

In case you select the wrong movable location, you will see the following message:

Error message

19.3.6. Select another logistic carrier and movable location

It is possible, through custom development, that a pick list is defined to have multiple Picking logistic units. In this case you need to assign another logistic carrier and another movable location to this particular picklist, therefore you will be navigated back to step 3. Select a logistic carrier and you need go through steps 3-5 again (Select a logistic carrier, Scan an SSCC, Select a movable location).
Please note that in this case you will have to select a new movable location which is not in use.

19.3.7. Select another picklist

In case you have more than one picklist in the selected wave, you will be navigated back to step 2. Select a picklist and you need to go through steps 2-5 again (Select a picklist, Select a logistic carrier, Scan an SSCC, Select a movable location).
Please note that you will have to select a new movable location which is not in use.

19.3.8. Wave has been prepared

In case you have no more picklist in the flow, you will be informed that the wave has been prepared. Tap OK and start a Multi picking flow to pick the necessary items into the right boxes.

Error message

19.4. Zone picking

In the zone picking flow the picking is performed based on a wave. Only the items in the current zone are listed for the operator. For information on configuring zones and zone types see Working with Zones and Zone Types.

19.4.1. Select a wave

Select a wave from the list. Every wave that contains at least one pick list that verifies the following criteria is listed:

  • The status is ’Not Ready’, ’Ready’, ’Partially Ready’ or ’Partially Picked’
  • The pick list is not customer collect
  • The ‘Use for zone picking’ option is enabled for the pick list type
  • The ‘Use for Production?’ option is not enabled for the pick list type
  • Stock locking for pick lists is not disabled on the 'General Settings' tab of the Organizational Structure

Wave

When the ‘Only show completely unlocked waves in case of zone picking?’ option is set to true on the on the pick list controller, only waves not locked by a user will be listed.

When there is no custom wave description added on the pick list controller, the following information is displayed for waves with multiple pick list:

  • [number of the picklist proposal] pick list number

If the wave contains only one pick list, then the following information is displayed by default:

  • Wave number
  • Customer card code and name
  • Shipping address

When the ‘Auto select the wave?’ option is set to true on the on the pick list controller, the system will automatically select the wave, and only the selected wave is shown on the screen.

19.4.2. Select a zone

Scan the zone or select it from the list. The zones containing the allocated pick locations are listed if the ‘Use for zone picking’ option is enabled for the zone.

Zone

19.4.3. Select an item to pick

Select an item to pick. Every item that has to be picked from the selected zone are listed.

Displayed information:

  • Pick location
  • Quantity to pick
  • Item code - description - barcode
  • Batch number
  • Best before date

When the ‘Consolidate items to pick?’ option is set to true on the pick list controller, items with the same batch number/best before date/quality status/location … will be picked in one action.

Item

Continue the picking as described in the picking flow.
When the product to pick has been identified, the system locks it. If another user scans or selects the product, an error message will appear.

If the ‘Lock wave by zone/user (Zone picking)’ option is enabled on the pick list controller, every item to pick will be locked for the current user after the first product has been identified in the zone picking flow.

Ad Hoc Picking Flow

Overview

This documentation describes the prerequisites, the configuration steps and the three tasks of the Ad Hoc Picking flow - Customer Collect, Picklist and Route - on the Mobile Client.

Ad Hoc Picking flow

Prerequisites

1. Route task: The picklist is assigned to a route (see Routes Guide).

2. Customer Collect task: The Customer Collect? setting is set to Yes on the Picklist screen.

Picklist screen

Note: If the Is customer coming to collect goods? setting is enabled on the Shipping Types form, the system automatically sets the Customer Collect? setting to true on the generated Picklist Proposal and Picklist screens.

Shipping Types

Configuration

1. Configure the Produmex Picklist Types UDT.

  • Make sure that the Use for Production option is not enabled for the picklist type.
  • Make sure that the Use for Ad Hoc Picking option is enabled for the picklist type.

2. Configure the general settings related to the picking process on the General tab of the Organizational Structure:

  • Picklist Proposal Allowed to Exceed Order
  • Do Not Lock Stock on Picking
  • Allow Overpicking
  • Allow Overpicking (Customer Collect)

General settings

3. Configure the Ad Hoc Picking settings and the General settings of the picklist controller.

Workflow

Ad Hoc Picking Flow Steps

1. Start the flow and select a task

On the Mobile Client select Sales > Ad Hoc Picking and select a task: Customer Collect, Picklist or Route.

Start the flow

Next step:

2. Select a route

Scan or select a route from the list. Every open route that contains at least one picklist is listed.

Displayed information: route date, route number and route description (Template code)

Route

Continue with step 3. Select a picklist.

3. Select a picklist

Scan or select a picklist from the list. Picklists belonging to a wave that is started are indicated with red color.

The following information is displayed:

  • Shipping ID
  • Picklist number
  • Customer code, description and barcode
  • Due date
  • User(s)

Select a picklist

Continue with step 4. Pick and pack remarks.

4. Pick and pack remarks

If a pick and pack remark is added to the picklist, the remark is shown after selecting the picklist. Tap OK to acknowledge the remark.

Pick and pack remark

Next step:

5. Customer Collect: Select a task

On the Select a task screen you have the following options:

  • Tap the Pick items button to start picking the items.
  • If you have already performed a picking process, tap the Confirm goods button to confirm one by one that the products are loaded or tap the Confirm all picked goods button to confirm in one step that the products are loaded.

Note: The Confirm all picked goods button is displayed on the screen if the Allow confirmation that all goods were picked setting is enabled on the picklist controller and the picklist does not contain any item managed by Produmex serial numbers.

Task

Next step:

6. Identify a moveable location

If the Allow to select a moveable location during ad hoc picking setting is enabled on the picklist controller, the Identify moveable location screen is displayed.

Note: If the Auto selection of moveable location during picking? setting is enabled on the picklist controller, the moveable location is automatically selected and the Identify moveable location screen is not displayed. In this case continue with step 9. Select a product.

On the Identify moveable location screen you have the following options:

  • Scan a moveable location or tap the Select moveable location button and select a moveable location from the displayed list. Continue with step 9. Select a product.

Identify or select a moveable

7. Select a customer logistic unit

When there is a picked logistic unit with an open picklist for the same customer and ship to address, the system displays the Select a customer logistic unit screen. You have the following options:

  • If you want to perform the picking onto an existing logistic unit, scan the SSCC of the logistic unit.
  • If you want to perform the picking onto a new logistic unit, tap the New logistic unit button.

Note: By default, only the open logistic units on the same loading dock and for the same customer are listed. When the Allow multiple customers on SSCC? option is enabled on the picklist controller, logistic units for other customers are also listed.

Select a customer logistic unit

Continue with step 8. Create a master or a normal SSCC.

8. Create a master or a normal SSCC

When the Allow to create master SSCC option is enabled on the picklist controller, the system displays the Select a task screen. You have the following options:

  • Tap the Create master SSCC button to pick onto a master SSCC.
  • Tap the Create normal SSCC button to pick onto a normal SSCC.

Create a  master or a normal SSCC

Continue with step 9. Select a product.

9. Select a product

On the Select a product screen each item with open quantity to pick is listed from the picklist.

The following information is displayed:

  • Possible pick locations
  • Item code, description and barcode
  • Quantity to pick

Select a Product

You have the following options:

  • Scan or select a product (see section 9.1)
  • Scan the GTIN (AI 02) of the product (see section 9.2)
  • Tap the Logistic unit is full button (see section 9.3)
9.1. Scan or select a product

Scan or select a product from the list and continue with section 10. Select a loading dock.

9.2. Scan the GTIN (AI 02) of the product

Scan a valid GTIN (AI 02) code and continue with the 13. Enter the quantity step.

Note: If an invalid code is scanned, the system displays the The product is not correct error message. If you tap OK, the system displays the Select a product screen again and a valid code must be entered to proceed with the flow.

9.3. Logistic unit is full

If the picking is performed on an already existing logistic unit, the Logistic Unit is full button is displayed.

  • If the selected logistic unit is full, tap the button and then tap Yes to confirm. Now the logistic label is printed, the system displays Select a product screen again and you can continue the picking process on another logistic unit.
  • If you tap No, the picking continues on the same logistic unit and the Select a product screen is displayed.

Logistic unit is full

10. Select a loading dock

When the Choose dock on ad hoc picking setting is enabled on the picklist controller, the system displays the Select a location screen and a loading dock must be selected.

Note: The setting applies to Picklist and Route tasks.

Select a loading doc

Continue with section 11. Express Ad Hoc Picking.

11. Express Ad Hoc Picking

If the Express Ad Hoc Picking setting is enabled on the picklist controller, the Scan SSCC or Location screen (step 12) is skipped after selecting or scanning a product on the Select a product screen. You have the following options:

  • If the item is available on one single location, the system immediately displays the Enter the quantity screen.
  • If the item is available on more than one location, the system displays the Select a location screen. You can scan the location or select it from the list and then the system displays the Enter the quantity screen.

Express Ad Hoc Picking

Continue with step 13. Enter the quantity.

12. Scan SSCC or location

On the Scan SSCC or Location screen the following information is displayed:

  • Possible pick locations
  • Item code, description and barcode
  • Quantity to pick

Scan SSCC or Location

You have the following options:

  • Scan the source SSCC (see section 12.1)
  • Scan a pick location (see section 12.2)
  • Select a pick location (see section 12.3)
  • Select another moveable location (see section 12.4)
  • Skip the item (see section 12.5)
12.1. Scan the source SSCC

Scan the source SSCC and continue with step13. Enter the quantity.

12.2. Scan a pick location

If the product has no SSCC, scan a pick location and the Scan a product screen is displayed. Scan the product or tap the Select a product button and select the necessary product from the list.

Scan a Location

Continue with step 13. Enter the quantity.

12.3. Select a pick location

If the product to pick has no SSCC, it is also possible to select the necessary location from a list as follows.

  1. Tap No SSCC and the system displays the Scan a Location screen.
  2. Tap Select Location.
  3. Select a pick location from the displayed list. All locations in the warehouse with available stock of the item are listed.
  4. The Scan a product screen is displayed. Scan the product or tap the Select a product button and select the necessary product from the list.

Select a Location

Note:

  • The No SSCC button is not displayed if the Ad Hoc: Force to Scan SSCC setting is enabled on picklist controller.
  • If the Allow ad hoc picking from bulk locations setting is enabled on the picklist controller, the system displays bulk locations (non-pick locations) as well.
  • The Reason requirements when skipping first location setting on the picklist controller defines if a reason is required when selecting a location that is different from the first suggested one.
  • If the Show Stock for Location setting is enabled on the picklist controller, the Select a pick location screen shows the free stock quantity of the selected item for each location listed on the screen.

Select a Pick Location

Continue with step 13. Enter the quantity.

12.4. Other tasks

If you are using a moveable location, the Other tasks button is displayed on the Scan SSCC or location screen and if you tap the button, you have the following options:

  • If you tap the Other mov. loc. button, the system displays the Identify moveable location screen. You can replace the previously selected movable location with another moveable location and then the system goes back to the Select a product screen.
  • If the item must be skipped, tap the Skip item button (see section 12.5).

Other tasks

12.5. Skip the item

If the item must be skipped, tap the Skip Item button and on the next screen, select a reason for not picking the full stock (at least 10 characters).

  • If there is no more item in the picklist, the system displays the All items are picked screen. Tap OK and the system goes back to the Select a picklist screen.
  • If there is another item in the picklist, the system goes back to the Select a product screen.

Skipping item

13. Enter the quantity

Add the quantity to pick and tap the right arrow.

Enter the Quantity

Note:

  • By default, the quantity displayed in the quantity input field is 1. If the Ad hoc: Auto fill quantity setting is enabled on the picklist controller, the quantity to pick is displayed in the quantity input field of the screen.
  • If there is not enough free stock, the following message is displayed: There is not enough free stock. Please enter a new quantity. Tap OK and the system displays the Enter the quantity screen again.

Next step:

14. Customer Collect: Select a task

If there is another item to pick, you have the following options on the Select a task screen:

  • Tap the Go to customer button to go back to the Select a picklist screen.
  • Tap the Pick more items button to go back to the Select a product screen and continue the picking.

Task

15. All items are picked

The system displays the message All items are picked. Tap OK.

All items are picked

Note:

  • If the Ad hoc picking: Keep picking the same item setting is enabled on the picklist controller, the next product to pick can only be selected if the maximum pick quantity of the previously selected product is picked.
  • If the full quantity of the selected item is picked and the 204 - Picking: after item is picked print event is set for the picklist type (on the Print Events tab of the Organizational Structure), the system asks if you want to print a label. To proceed with the printing tap OK.

Next step:

  • Customer Collect task:
    • If the picking process is performed on a movable location, the picklist status is picked. You can start the flow again and confirm the goods (see step 5. Customer Collect: Select a task) or start the packing process with the Packing flow, the Item Packing flow or the Mobile Packing flow.
    • If no movable location is used during the picking process, you start the flow again and confirm the goods (see step 5. Customer Collect: Select a task).
  • Picklist and Route tasks:
    • If the picking process is performed on a movable location, the picklist status is picked and you can start the packing process with the Packing flow, the Item Packing flow or the Mobile Packing flow.
    • If no movable location is used during the picking process, the status of the picklist is defined by the Always status picked? setting of the Produmex Picklist Types UDT (PMX_PLTY).
      • If the setting is enabled, the status of the picklist is picked at the end of the flow and you can proceed with the Consolidated Packing flow.
      • If the setting is disabled, the status of the picklist is packed at the end of the flow and you can proceed with the Shipping flow.

16. Customer Collect: Select a product to confirm

On the Select a product to confirm screen every picked item from the picklist is displayed.

Displayed information:

  • Code of the loading dock
  • Item code, description and barcode
  • Quantity to load

Scan or select a product from the list to pack and tap the right arrow button. Continue with step 17. Customer Collect: Product confirmation.

Note: If you want to stop the loading, tap the Stop confirmation button and the system goes back to the Select a task screen.

Product confirmation

17. Customer Collect: Product confirmation

On the confirmation screens tap Yes to confirm that all products are loaded. The system displays the message The picklist has been finished. Tap OK.

The status of the picklist is closed and the system generates the Sales Delivery document.

Product confirmation

If you Tap No on the first confirmation screen, the system asks you to check the SSCC and the quantity during the confirmation. Scan or select the SSCC and add the item quantity.

Identify SSCC

18. Customer Collect: Confirm all picked goods

Tap the Yes button to confirm in one step that all picked items are loaded. The system closes the picklist and creates the Sales Delivery document.

If you tap the No button, the system goes back to the Select a task screen without confirming the loading.

Confirm all picked goods

19.6. Undo Picking

With the ’Unpick products’ flow it is possible to correct the picking by unpicking picked/packed goods that are not yet loaded.

Select pick listScan SSCCIdentify product(s)Scan destination location or SSCCSelect reasonProcess unpicking

19.6.1. Initiate the flow

To initiate the flow, press the ’Undo picking’ button in the Sales menu.

Undo picking

19.6.2. Select pick list

Select the pick list from the list. A pick list is listed if its status is ’Partially Packed’ or ’Packed’. Displayed information on the screen:

  1. Pick list proposal number
  2. Pick list number
  3. Customer – Ship to Address

Select a pick list

19.6.3. Scan SSCC

Scan the SSCC. Only SSCC’s verifying the following criteria can be scanned:

  • The logistic unit is picked/packed for the selected pick list
  • The logistic unit is not yet loaded

SSCC’s that verify this criteria are listed on the screen. The logistic units are sorted based on the SSCC number.

Scan an SSCC

19.6.4. Identify product(s)

Press the ‘Undo picking for all items’ button to unpick every product from the selected SSCC. The system proceeds to the 5. Scan destination location screen.

Scan the barcode of the product or select it from a list after pressing the ‘Select a product’ button. Only products that are on the logistic unit can be scanned or selected.

When unpicking a mono pallet, the system skips this screen and automatically proceeds to the next screen.

Scan a product

If the selected item/item on the mono pallet is managed by batches and there is more than one batch on the logistic unit, select the batch as well. Every batch of the selected item that is on the logistic unit is listed on the screen.

On the next screen enter the quantity. For more information about entering the quantity please see: 4.3.4. Screens for entering additional information. The quantity to unpick cannot exceed the open quantity on the logistic unit.

19.6.5. Scan destination location or SSCC

To move the unpicked products to an existing logistic unit, scan the logistic unit. If the scanned SSCC is not in stock, identify the destination location on the next screen.
To create a new logistic unit, press the ‘New SSCC’ button then identify the destination location as described below.
To move the selected products without changing the logistic unit, scan or select a location from a list.

Please note: When moving a partial pallet without creating a new SSCC, products will be moved without a linked SSCC.

19.6.5.1. With location suggestions

When location suggestions are enabled on the Location controller and for the warehouse, the default location is displayed on the screen, but the stock can be moved to any other active location in the warehouse. The default location will be the first suggested location and the list of the locations will be sorted according the logic described in 8. Location suggestions.

 Destination location - with location suggestions

19.6.5.2. Without location suggestions

When location suggestions are not enabled on the Location controller, an additional ‘Select empty location button’ is displayed on the screen.

  • Press the ‘Select location’ button the see the list of the active locations from the warehouse of the pick list.
  • Press the ‘Select empty location’ button to see the list of the empty active locations from the warehouse of the pick list.

Destination location - without location suggestions

19.6.6. Select reason

Select a reason from the list. Every reason that can be used for picking is listed.

Select a reason

When creating a new SSCC the ’Warehouse: a new LU has been created (700)’ print event is triggered and the logistic label is printed after the reason is selected.

19.6.7. Process unpicking

After the unpicking is processed, the pick list lines in question are updated and the inventory lockings are removed.

If the total quantity on the pick list line is unpicked, the system adds the reason to the pick list line then closes it.
If the pick list line is partially unpicked, the ‘Open’ and ‘Picked’ quantity is decreased by the unpicked quantity. The unpicked quantity is added on a closed line that contains the selected reason.

After the pick list is updated, the unpicked products are moved to the selected location.

Items are unpicked

Box Pick and Pack Flow

Overview

With the Box Pick and Pack Flow on the Mobile Client, it is possible to perform the picking process directly into boxes on a cart.

The flow is based on a single picklist or a wave containing picklists for multiple customers. The flow supports picklists created from Sales Orders.

If a full SSCC is picked, the system keeps the existing SSCC number, otherwise the system generates an SSCC number when the first item is picked.

The process always requires the use of a movable location. When the picking process is completed for the wave, the Unload Movable Locations to Dock Flow can be started on the Mobile Client to unload the movable locations to the dock.

Configuration

Important: The Box Pick and Pack Flow is a new framework. When upgrading to product version 2020.06 or higher, the system creates a copy on the Extension Parameters and applies the settings to the Box Pick and Pack Flow. Then the Box Pick and Pack Flow can be configured only in the database, that is, if any Extension Parameter is changed in SAP Business One later on, the change does not affect the Box Pack and Pack Flow.

Exceptions: The following settings have a fixed value. If they are changed in the database, the change does not have any effect.

Picklist ControllerSettingValue
All, except Ad Hoc Picking sectionAuto select the wave?always false
Consolidate items to pick?always false
Allow to identify the SSCC to pick on?always true
General sectionAllow multiple customers on SSCC?always false

Workflow

Box Pick and Pack Flow Steps

1. Start the flow

On the Mobile Client select Sales > Box Pick and Pack.

Continue with section 2. Select a wave.

Select function

2. Select a wave

The Select Wave screen lists the waves in which the picklists have the status of Not ready, Ready and Partially picked.

Select a wave from the list and tap the right arrow button.

Continue with section 3. List of items in the wave.

Select a wave

3. List of items in the wave

The List of Items in Wave screen lists all the items in the wave. The screen does not display the locations because the picklist is not locked yet.

You have the following options:

Select another wave:
Check the list of items and if another wave must be selected, tap the left arrow button to go back to the Select Wave screen and select a different wave.

Start picking:
Tap the Start Picking button to start the picking process. After tapping the button, the system locks the picklist and the status of the picklist is Ready.

After tapping the button, the system prints the item label if the printing is configured for the item.

Continue with section 4. Pick and pack remark.

List of items in wave

4. Pick and pack remark

If a Pick and Pack remark has been added to the picklist in the selected wave, the system displays the remark after starting the picking process.

Tap OK to acknowledge the remark and continue with section 5. Select an item to pick.

Pick and pack remark

5. Select an item to pick

On the Items Still to Pick screen select an item from the list and tap the right arrow button.

Items Still to Pick

6. Scan a source SSCC

On the Scan an SSCC screen scan a source SSCC and the system keeps the SSCC number.

  • If you are performing the first picking process for the customer in the wave, continue with section 13. Identify a movable location.
  • If this is not the first picking process performed for the customer in the wave, continue with section 14. Items are picked.

If you must select another movable location or alternate stock or you must skip the item, tap the Other tasks button and continue with section 8. Other tasks.

Scan an SSCC

7. Identify pick location

On the Identify Pick Location screen you have the following options:

Scan a location and continue with section 9. Scan a product.

Select a location from a list as follows.

  1. Tap the Select Location button.
  2. On the Select a Location screen select the necessary location from the list.
  3. Tap the right arrow button and continue with section 9. Scan a product.

If you must select another movable location or alternate stock or you must skip the item, tap the Other tasks button and continue with section 8. Other tasks.

Select a location

8. Other tasks

When you tap the Other Tasks button, you can select another movable location, select alternate stock or skip the item.

Select another movable location

The Other Mov. Loc. button is displayed on the Select a Task screen if a movable location has already been identified while performing the picking process for the selected wave.

If you have already identified a movable location, the system automatically uses this movable location when picking the second item. If the picking process must be continued on a different movable location, proceed as follows.

  1. On the Select a Task screen tap the Other Mov. Loc. button.
  2. On the Identify Movable Location screen scan a movable location or tap the Select Movable Location button.
  3. If you have tapped the Select Movable Location button, select a movable location from the list and tap the right arrow button.

If you use more than one movable location and start the picking process again, the system asks you on which movable location you want to continue the picking.

Selecting another movable location

Select alternate stock:

  1. On the Select a Task screen tap the Alternate Stock button.
  2. On the Select Alternate Stock screen select the stock.
  3. Tap the right arrow button.

Note: The alternate stock has to be free stock.

Selecting alternate stock

Skip the item:

On the Select a Task screen tap the Skip Item button.

If there are no more items in the picklist, the system displays the message There is no more item to pick. Tap OK and the flow goes to step 2. Select a Wave.

9. Scan a product

On the Scan a Product screen scan a product or select a product from a list.

To select a product from a list, proceed as follows.

  1. Tap the Select a Product button.
  2. Select a product from the list.
  3. Tap the right arrow button.

Continue with section 10. Enter the quantity.

Select a product

10. Enter the quantity

On the Enter the Quantity screen enter the quantity of the item to pick and tap the right arrow button.

For more information about the quantity adding screens see Screens for entering additional information.

Enter the quantity

11. Select a logistic carrier

On the Select a Logistic carrier screen select a logistic carrier from a list and tap the right arrow button to proceed with the flow.

If no logistic carrier is used, tap the No Logistic Carrier button.

If the 203 - Picking: Prepare cart: New SSCC created print event is set for the picklist type, the print event is triggered when a new SSCC is created.

Continue with section 13. Identify a movable location.

Select a logistic carrier

12. Identify the destination SSCC

If an SSCC has already been created for the customer while performing the picking process in the wave, the system displays the Identify SSCC to Confirm screen and you have the following options:

  • Scan the destination SSCC.
    • The screen lists only open SSCCs, but a closed SSCC can be scanned as well if it has not been unloaded yet. In this case the system asks if you want to reopen the SSCC.
    • If the identified destination SSCC is on a movable location different from the movable location that has been selected in the flow before, the system will use this movable location as the currently selected movable location. A different movable location can be selected on the Other Tasks screen.
    • Continue with section 14. Items are picked.
  • To close the SSCC manually, tap the Close SSCC button.
    • The status of the SSCC is set to Is ready for packing.
    • If the 200 - Picking: New LU full print event is set for the picklist type, the print event is triggered when the SSCC is closed.

13. Identify a movable location

On the Identify Movable Location screen scan a movable location or select one from a list.

To select a movable location from a list, proceed as follows.

  1. Tap the Select Movable Location button.
  2. On the Select a Movable Location screen select a movable location from the list.
  3. Tap the right arrow button to proceed with the flow.

Continue with section 14. Items are picked.

Select a movable location

14. Items are picked

The system displays the message The items are picked. Tap OK.

  • The status of the picklist line is Picked. If there is another item in the picklist to be picked, the status of the picklist is Partially picked and the system goes to step 5. Select an item to pick.
  • If the status of all the picklist lines in the picklist is Picked, the status of the picklist is Picked.
  • When the picking process is completed for the wave, the system closes all the SSCCs that have not been closed manually in the wave.
    • The status of all the SSCCs in the wave is Is ready for packing and the status of all the picklists in the wave is Picked. The flow goes to step 2. Select a Wave.
    • If the 200 - Picking: New LU full print event is set for the picklist type, the print event is triggered when the SSCCs are closed.

When the picking process is completed for the wave, the Unload Movable Locations to Dock Flow allows for selecting the wave and the process of unloading the movable locations to the dock can be started.

Items are picked

20. How to work with both Produmex Manufacturing and Produmex WMS

First install Produmex Manufacturing.

Then install Produmex WMS. In order to install Produmex WMS in a way that it will be integrated with Produmex Manufacturing, Produmex Manufacturing database elements should be existent in the company database.
Execute the installation as described in the Produmex WMS Installation Guide. Do not forget to enable the stored procedures and the Notification Listener stored procedures. Make sure that the ‘Integration with Produmex Manufacturing’ checkbox is checked before you start the database upgrade.

Database Upgrade

20.2. Prerequisites

Produmex Manufacturing
Install the initial manufacturing data as described in Setup initial data.

Produmex WMS
Set up the production line(s). For more information about the production line settings please see: Production line. Configure the production settings on the Production controller. In order to execute the production picking based on a pick list, enable the Create proposal for picking option on the Picking for production controller.

For more information about the Produmex WMS extensions on the Bill of Materials and the Production order please see: Configurations/Production
For more information about other production settings for Produmex WMS please see: Configuration settings for the production

Setup Time UoM
In order to create operations, add the following time units of measure to the Units of Measure - Setup (OUOM) standard table:

  • min - Minutes
  • hr - Hours
  • week - Week
  • S - Seconds
  • day - Day

BOM Setup with unfinished products
The material flow of the unfinished products can be monitored with the help of the ’Unfinished Product’ items. Set the ‘Qty tolerance %’ to 100 for the unfinished product on the ‘Unfinished material’ line in order to allow pick list to be created even though no pickable stocks of the unfinished materials are found.

BoM with unfinished products

During a production it is possible that not the total produced quantity of the unfinished product is consumed. In order to avoid stock allocation on pick list/pick list proposals for unfinished products only store the remaining unfinished products on a location that verifies one of the following:

  • Location where the ‘Block stock from being used for the picking process’ option is enabled.

20.3. Production steps

In order to work with both Produmex Manufacturing and Produmex WMS you have to create a production order in a WMS managed warehouse. Otherwise the production flow will be the same as described in Produmex Manufacturing Functional Guide.

Make sure that both add-on runs.

Please note: The ‘Backflush’ issue type is only supported for operation and cost items for production orders in a Produmex WMS warehouse.

Flowchart

20.3.1. Create production order

First create the production order(s). Production orders can be created:

20.3.2. Assign the production line

20.3.2.1. Assign production line to a single production order

Assign a production line to the production order by selecting a production line from the dropdown menu next to the warehouse field. Every active production line from the warehouse can be selected.

A production line can only be assigned while the production order status is ‘Planned’.

Production line

The assigned production line defines the input, output and lined up locations for the production. During the production, materials will be consumed from the input location, lined up location and the production line and the products and by-products will be received into the output location.

20.3.2.2. Assign production line to multiple production orders

Open the Production Management Cockpit from the Production module. Select the production orders and click on the ’Set Production Line’ button. On the opening screen select the production line from the dropdown list then press ’Update’.

Please note: The production line can only be set for ’Planned’ production orders. The selected production orders must be from the same warehouse.

20.3.3. Release production order

As the next step release the production order. The production order can be released in the following ways:

20.3.3.1. Single order release
  • On the production order
    • Set the status of the production order to ‘Released’ then click on the ‘Update’ button.
  • On the Production Manager
    • Open the Production Manager from the Produmex Production module. Click on the ‘Production orders’ button. On the ‘Production order’ screen select the production line from the dropdown menu. Select the production order and click on the ‘Release order’ button.
    • For more information please see: Release the production order
20.3.3.2. Mass order release

Open the Production Management Cockpit from the Production module. Select the production order(s) and click on the ‘Change Selected’ button. On the opening form select ‘Released’ as the Pr.Ord. Status from the dropdown menu and click on ‘OK’. Recalculate the production orders by clicking on the ‘Recalculate’ button.

Production Management Cockpit

The following additional columns are displayed on the Production Management Cockpit:

  • Pmx Production Line: The code of the assigned production line.
  • Pmx Status: The Produmex status of the production order. Possible values: Planned/Started/On hold/Closed

20.3.4. Pick components

The picking can be executed in the following ways:

  • Based on the production order. The stock to be picked will not be locked and the system allows overpicking. For more information please see: Picking for production.
  • Based on a pick list. The stock to be picked will be locked for the pick list and the system only allows overpicking if the ‘Allow continuous picking for production’ option is enabled on the Picking for production controller. For more information please see: Pick list for production.
    When creating a pick list proposal, every item on a material line will be proposed, if there is available stock except for lined up materials with the Allow to pick lined up?’ option set to ‘False’.
    Please note: A pick list proposal cannot be created if there is a material with a non-Produmex warehouse set.

20.3.5. Start the production

Usually is not required to set the PMX status to start in order to work with Produmex PDC. However we recommend to do so for better visibility: started production orders are marked on the Production Management Cockpit.

Starting the production order with Produmex is only required in the following cases:

  • To assign lined-up locations
  • To pre-assign batch based on the batch number generator for production
  • If the batch has a best before date definition

Start the production in the office environment. After the production is started, the Produmex status of the order will be changed to ‘Started’.

The production order can be started by clicking on the ‘Start’ button on the production order, or from the Production Manager: Open the Production Manager from the Produmex Production module. Click on the ‘Production orders’ button. On the opening Production order screen select a production line from the dropdown menu. Select the production order and click on the ‘Start production’ button. Only released production orders can be started. The Start production screen will open.

On the Start production screen define the batch number and the best before date for the product and the source locations for the lined up components. For more information please see: Start production order/4.1.Office

Define the batch number and best before date of the product
If the product is managed by batches, a ‘Batch number’ field is shown on the screen. For more information about the settings of the second batch number please see: Batchnumber production company
If the product has a second batch number, a ‘Batch number 2’ field is shown on the screen. For more information about the settings of the second batch number please see: Batchnumber production company
If the product has a best before date, an additional ‘Best before date’ field is shown on the screen. The default best before date depends on the Expiry definition set on the Produmex Production tab of the Item Master Data. The adjustment of the default best before date can be enabled on the Best before for production generator.

Define the batch number and best before date of the product
If there are components on the production order that has to be lined up, assign a lined up location for the component. For more information about assigning a lined up location for an item please see: Start production order/4.1.1. Assign a tank

To start the production, click on the ‘Start production’ button. The Produmex status of the production order will be changed to ‘Started’.

Start production

20.3.6. Execute the production or the shopfloor

Execute the production on the shopfloor with Produmex PDC as described in Production Data Collector. Because the materials will be issued from the input/lined up location or the production line and the (by-)products will be received to the output location, the steps of the material issue and the product receipt will differ from the standard PDC steps.

Please note: The integrated production execution will not work when using the PDC legacy mode.

20.3.6.1. Receive main product and by-products

Receive the main product or by-products on the ‘Products’ screen. On the grid the main product, the by-products and the unfinished product(s) are listed. The main product is always listed first.

The default quantity of the main product is the produced quantity defined on the partial or complete job/setup screen. The quantity of the main product cannot be adjusted.

The default quantity of the by-product and the unfinished product is calculated based on the quantity received from the main product and the base quantity on the production order. The quantity of the by-product and the unfinished product can be adjusted.

Products

Destination SSCC
Main product and by-product(s)
To add the main product/by-product into an existing logistic unit, scan the SSCC or select it from a list after pressing the SSCC field. On the next screen select the SSCC from the list. Only SSCC’s stored on the output location of the production line can be scanned or selected. To add the main product/by-product into an SSCC, select the SSCC and press the ’Ok’ button.
It is also possible to add the produced product into a new SSCC. Press the ’New’ button. A new SSCC will be added to the list.
The list of SSCC’s can be filtered on the Search field. Add the text/numbers to search for then press the ‘Search’ button. Only the SSCC’s containing the entered text/numbers will be listed.
If no SSCC number has been selected, the system will automatically add the main products/by-products onto a new SSCC.
After the product receipt booking has been processed, the main product and the by-product(s) are received to the output location of the production line.

Select SSCC

Unfinished product
The produced unfinished product will be received onto the production line from where it can be consumed in the next operation. Unfinished products will not be received onto an SSCC, regardless whether the user defined one or not.

Batch number and best before date
If the main product/by-product is managed by batches and/or has a best before date, press the ’Serial/Batch button’.
The ’Product Batch Number’ screen will open.

Batch number

  1. Batch number: The default batch number is the batch number specified on the Start production screen of the Production Manager. The batch number can be modified on this screen regardless of the Batch number production company controller setting.
    Please note: Every product produced during a job has to have the same batch number and best before date.
  2. SSCC number: The SSCC number of the destination logistic unit. Cannot be modified.
  3. Second batch number: The default batch number is the batch number specified on the Start production screen of the Production Manager. The batch number can be modified on this screen regardless of the Batch number production company controller setting.
  4. Best before date: The default date is the best before date set on the Start production screen of the Production Manager. The best before date can be modified on this screen regardless of the Best before for production generator setting.

Serial numbers
If the main product/by-product is managed by SAP serial numbers, press the ‘Serial/Batch’ button. The ‘Product serial numbers’ screen will open. Add the serial numbers as described in Product Serial numbers.

Please note: Do not select a bin location for the serial numbers.

Batch Attributes
If the Enable batch attributes in PDC option is enabled on the Thin Client 2 tab of Produmex Manufacturing settings, an additional ‘Attributes’ button is displayed on the screen.

Press the ’Attributes’ button to add the batch attributes of the product.

On the next screen every required and optional batch attribute that is defined for the product on the Produmex Attributes tab is listed.

The Attribute Name is the name of the batch attribute type. The Required column marks whether the batch attribute is set as required or optional. If a batch attribute is required, the user must set a value in order to proceed. On the value column the current batch attribute value is displayed.

To set a value, select the line of the batch attribute and press the ‘Set value’ button. On the next screen set the value. The method for entering the value varies according to the batch attribute convertor:

  • List: Select the value from the list. Every value that is defined for the batch attribute type on the Batch attribute valid values user table is listed.
  • Date: Enter the date in the following format: mm/dd/yy. To select the date on a form, press F12 and set the date with the up and down arrows. By default the current date is displayed. Press the  icon to set the date back to the current date. Press the  icon to close the date selector. Press the  icon to set the date.
  • Int: Enter the value to the Attribute Value field. You can add a whole number as the value.
  • Double: Enter the value to the Attribute Value field. You can add a number with decimals as the value.
  • String: Enter the value to the Attribute Value field. You can add a sequence of alphanumeric characters as the value.

After the booking is processed, you can see the booked batch attributes on the PDC Bookings Administration form.

Select the line of the booking. On the product grid click on the golden arrow in the Compl. Qty. column. On the opening form you can see the batch attribute values.

Modify batch attributes
Batch attributes can be modified after the booking is created. On the Admin screen, press the Modify button and navigate to the Batch Attributes screen.
For more information about the Admin screen please see: Admin

20.3.6.2. Issue Materials

Specify the consumed quantities on the ’Materials’ screen. Every material linked to the milestone operation are listed. Add the quantities as described in: 2.2.5. Materials

Materials will be consumed from the input location/lined up location of the production line or from the production line directly therefore no bin locations can be selected.
Stocks to be consumed from a lined up will be sorted based on the consumption algorithm of the lined up location. Other stocks will be sorted by FEFO, then in the order they were moved to the production input line: PMX_ITRI.”BestBeforeDate”, PMX_INVT.“InternalKey”.

After the PDCProcessor processed the booking, the material(s) will be issued in SAP Business One with the specified quantities.

Batch number
Press the ‘Serial/Batch’ button to identify the batch number. Follow the steps described in: Material Batch Number Picker

Because the materials are issued from the input location/lined up location/production line, no bin locations can be selected and the ‘Split’ button is not displayed.

Serial numbers
Press the ‘Serial/Batch’ button to scan the serial numbers. Follow the steps described in: Material Serial Number Picker

20.3.7. Close production order

After the production has been finished, close the production order. First set the ‘Prod.Status’ UDF to ‘Closed’ on the production order then change the ‘Status’ on the header to ‘Closed’.

Production order

20.4.Limitations

  • Advanced outsourcing with unfinished products
  • Items having a second batch number or a best before date that are not managed by batches are not supported as products or by-products.
  • Materials with PMX serial number
  • Do not use the Skip material serial/batch quantities screen setting

Sales Return Flow

Overview

If products are returned by customers, the sales return process can be initiated on the shop floor with the Sales Return Flow on the Mobile Client.

Configuration

1. If a reason must be selected when the item is returned, open the Item Master Data window and go to Produmex tab > Sales tab and enable the Enter Reason for Sales Return option.

2. Define the default quality status for the returned item. Open the Organizational Structure and on the Defaults tab define the quality status in the Quality Status Sales Return drop-down menu.

If a different quality status must be defined for a a given item, open the Item Master Data window and go to Produmex tab > Sales tab and enable the Default Quality Status for Sales Return option.

3. Define the batch number format and settings on the Batch number generator for sales return controller.

4. If multiple items or batches are not allowed on a returned logistic unit, enable the Force Mono Lot Pallet? option on the Sales Return Generator. In this case a new logistic unit must be created for each item during the Sales Return Flow.

Sales Return Flow steps

1. Start the flow

On the Mobile Client select Sales > Sales Return.

Start the flow

2. Select a customer

Select the customer. On the screen every Business Partner with Customer type is listed.

Select a customer

3. Select a task

Select a task from the following options:

  • Select a return request: Tap the Select a return request button to receive returned items based on a Return Request. On the next screen select the return request. Every open and approved return request for the selected customer is listed on the screen.
  • Select a delivery: Tap the Select a Delivery button to receive returned items based on an open delivery. On the next screen select the delivery. Every open delivery for the selected customer is listed.
  • No delivery: Tap the No Delivery button to receive the returned items without a delivery and continue with step 4. Scan a barcode.

There are two options to return goods linked to an A/R invoice:

  • Book a sales return on the Mobile Client with the No delivery task. Returned stocks are received, but the sales return document is not linked to the A/R invoice.
  • Book a credit note/credit memo document in SAP Business One. It is not supported by Produmex WMS.

Select a task

4. Scan a barcode

Scan the barcode of the returned item. The delivery information of the item is retrieved from the barcode.

If there is no logistic label, tap the No label on logistic unit button.

Scan a label

5. Scan a product

Scan the item or tap the Select a product button and select it from the list.

  • If the logistic label contains only one item, the system automatically proceeds with the item and skips this screen.
  • If the return is executed based on a delivery, only items from the delivery document can be scanned or selected.

Scan a product

6. Identify batch number / best before date

If the item is managed by batch numbers and/or has a best before date and this information is not included in the barcode, specify the batch attributes and the best before date as well. For more information please see: Screens for entering additional information.

The default batch number is generated based on the settings of the Batch number generator for sales return.

When receiving the returned items based on a Delivery or a Return Request that is linked to the delivery (or based on an invoice linked to a delivery), only batch numbers linked to the delivery document can be returned.

Select the batch number / best before date from the list. If there is only one batch linked to the Delivery document, the system automatically selects that batch number and skips this screen.

Identify batch number

7. Enter the quantity

Add the number of the returned items. For more information about adding quantity see Screens for entering additional information.

When receiving returned items based on a delivery, the number of the returned products cannot exceed the open quantity on the delivery document.

Enter the quantity

If the Enter reason for sales return option is enabled on the Produmex Sales tab of the Item Master data of the returned item,the system displays the Enter Reason screen. Select a reason from the list. Every reason that can be used for sales return is listed.

8. Add more products

Specify whether there are additional items to return.

If you tap Yes, the system goes to the Scan barcodes GS1 label screen. An additional Add the Returns button is displayed on the screen. Tap the button to receive the returned item.

With the No button you can finish the return process. If the Force mono lot pallet? option is enabled on the Sales return generator, this screen is automatically skipped because different items/batches must be received onto separate logistic units.

Add more items

9. Scan destination location / SSCC

If there is no more item, the system displays the Scan Destination Location or SSCC screen.

To add the returned items onto an existing logistic unit, scan the SSCC of that logistic unit. If the scanned SSCC is not in stock, identify the destination location on the next screen.

To add the returned items without a logistic unit, scan the destination location or tap the Select location or the Select empty location button and select it from a list.

  • Select location button: Every active location is listed from the warehouses defined for the scanner.
  • Select empty location button: The system lists only the empty locations of the warehouse(s).

Select location

To create a new logistic unit, tap the New SSCC button. On the next screen scan the destination location or tap either the Select location or the Select empty location button and select it from a list.

New SSCC

10. Returned item is added

The returned items are added to the selected location. Tap OK and the system goes back to the Select a customer screen.

A Sales Return document is created in SAP Business One.

  • If the return has been created based on a Delivery, the corresponding lines of the Delivery document are closed.
  • If the return has been created based on a Return Request, the corresponding lines of the Return Request document are closed.

If a new SSCC has been created, the Warehouse: a new LU has been created (700) print event is triggered after the return had been added.

Returned item is added

22. Routes Guide

For the delivery of goods to customers, Produmex Logistics offers a specific Routes module that allows you to group multiple deliveries into routes, and define the route planning.

Routes can be created from templates (route master data) or ad-hoc. The route planning windows can be customized on the Route Controller.

22.1. Create route from a template

22.1.1. Create route template(s)

First define the master data (template) for a specific delivery route. Open the Route template form via: Produmex>Routes>Route template.

Route template

Specify the code and the name of the route.

You can define the day the route is carried out by selecting a weekday from the dropdown menu. If the route is not bound to a specific day of the week, select the ‘No Weekday’ option. The weekday is for information only.

Select the loading dock from which the route departs from the dropdown menu. Every dock that can be used for loading can be selected.

It is possible to cancel a route template by selecting ‘Y’ as Canceled. Canceled route templates cannot be selected when creating a route from a template.

Add clients to the route template.
Click on the ‘Add client’ button to add a new line. Enter the code of the customer to the ‘Card code’ field. Other fields on the line will automatically populated. To change the ship to address, select the Ship to Code from the dropdown menu.

It is possible to modify the route sequence. Select a customer line then move it with the up and down arrows.

To delete a line, select the line then click on the ‘Delete client’ button.

Click on the ‘Add’ button to add the route template.

22.1.2. Create route

To create a route for specific orders on a specific date, open the Route Planning-Selection Criteria window via: Produmex>Routes>Route Details.

Route planning selection

On this form the following can be selected:

  • date when the route takes place
  • the applicable route template
  • the warehouse from which the route will be executed

Only warehouses managed by Produmex can be selected. It is possible to select a different warehouse than the warehouse of the loading dock on the template. It is also possible to select a date that is not on the weekday of the template.

Click on the ‘Ok’ button to create the route.

If there is no route matching the selected criteria, the system will create one. The ‘Route Detail’ window will open.

If there is an existing route matching the selected criteria, a system message will open. Click on the ‘Yes’ button to open the existing route or click on the ‘No’ button to create a new route. The new route will overwrite the existing route.

System message

Open orders that match the following criteria will be added to the new route:

  • the delivery date is identical with the date of the route or has passed by on the date of the route
  • the customer and the shipping address is assigned to the route
  • there is no pick list/pick list proposal for the sales order
  • the sales order is assigned to the selected route

When the route is created, a pick list proposal will be generated for each sales order on the route.

The Route Detail window will open up.

Route detail

The following information is displayed on the header:

  • Route date: The selected route date.
  • Template: The code of the selected template.
  • Description: The route name. The route name can be adjusted.
  • Number: The route number.
  • Dock: The loading dock. The default loading dock is the loading dock selected on the template. If the route was generated for a different warehouse, the default dock is the first dock from the loading docks of the warehouse sorted by: structure level/alphabet. It is possible to modify the loading dock.
    Select the dock from the dropdown menu. Every loading dock from the warehouse of the route is listed.
  • Status: The route status. Possible values:
    • Not released: The route can be modified.
    • Released: The route is released for shipping therefore cannot be modified.
    • Closed: The route is closed.
  • Route for ‘Proof of Delivery’?: This checkbox indicates whether the route is for proof of delivery or not. If the Routes are by default POD? (Y/N) option is enabled on the Route controller, this checkbox is automatically ticked.

Each pick list proposal created for the route has a dedicated line on the grid. On the grid the following information is displayed:

  • Customer code and name: The code and name of the customer.
  • Address: The ship to address.
  • Full Stock: The inventory status of the items that are on the pick list or pick list proposal linked to the route. Possible values:
    • N - None of the items on the pick list proposal are in stock.
    • P - Some of the items on the pick list proposal are in stock.
    • A - All items on the pick list proposal are in stock.
  • Stock compliant shelf life: The inventory status of the items using the shelf life that are on the pick list or pick list proposal.
    • N - None of the items on the pick list proposal checking the shelf life are in stock
    • P - Some of the items on the pick list proposal checking the shelf life are in stock
    • A - All items on the pick list proposal checking the shelf life are in stock.

It is possible to delete or add customers to the route.

To add an extra customer to the route, press the ‘Add client’ button then select the customer from the list. The customer will only be added to the route if (s)he has at least one open sales order without a pick list or pick list proposal. After the customer is added, pick list proposal(s) will be generated for the open sales order. The generated pick list proposal(s) will be assigned to the route.

To remove a pick list proposal from the route, select its line then press the ‘Delete client’ button. The pick list proposal will be closed and will be removed from the route.

The route sequence can be modified by selecting a line and moving it with the up and down arrows.

To generate pick lists from the sales orders assigned to the route click on the ‘Gen.pick list’ button.

Customer collect pick lists will not be added to the route.

22.1.3. Route planning

Routes can be changed and reorganized until their status is ‘Not Released’. This possibility is provided by the Route planning and the Routes map function.

22.1.3.1. Routes map

To see the route on the map and to get the driving directions, open the Routes Map screen via: Produmex>Routes>Routes map. Produmex uses Google Maps to display the roadmap and to get the driving directions.

On the left side of the window the map is shown. Next to the map open routes that have at least one pick list (proposal) are listed. Tick the checkbox next to the route to display it on the map. Multiple routes can be displayed.

To see the suggested driving directions, select the route from the dropdown list next to ‘Select driving directions’. A route can only be selected if its checkbox next to the map is checked. The Total distance and the suggested driving directions will be listed on the screen.

Routes on map

22.1.3.2. Route planning

To overview and modify the route, open the Route Planning screen via: Produmex > Route > Route planning.

The Route planning screen consists of four sections:

  • Open routes
  • Pick lists not on a route
  • Two sections for route details (Section 1 and Section 2)

On the Open routes section routes with the status ‘Not released’ are listed. Click on the ‘Refresh’ button to refresh the section.

  • Nr: The route number.
  • Description: The route description.
  • Route date: The route date.
  • Log.units: Number of the logistic units packed for the route.

On the Pick lists not on a route section open pick lists and pick list proposals that are not assigned to a route and are not customer collect are listed. Click on the ‘Refresh’ button to refresh the section.

  • Type: The document type. Possible values: ‘Pick list’ or ‘Pick list proposal’.
  • Nr: The number of the document.
  • Shipping ID: The shipping ID of the document.
  • Card Code & Card Name: The code and name of the customer.
  • The Shipping To address:
    • Street
    • Zip code
    • City
    • Country
  • Pick/Pack remarks: Remark for the picking and packing.
  • Log.units: The number of the logistic units packed for the pick list.
  • Status: The status of the pick list. This field is empty when the base document is a pick list proposal.

To see and modify the pick list and pick list proposals assigned to the route, open the route.

Select the route then click on the ‘>1’ button next to the routes section to open it on Section 1, or click on the ‘>2’ button to open it on Section 2.

Route Planning 1

When a route is opened in a section, pick list and pick list proposals assigned to the route are listed on the grid.

It is possible to change the route sequence, add and delete pick lists and pick list proposals or move them to another route.

To delete a pick list (proposal) select its line and click on the ‘-‘ button (1). The pick list removed from the route will be listed on the Pick lists not on a route section.

To add a pick list (proposal) select it from the list on Pick lists not on a route section and press the ‘>1’ or ‘>2’ button. The pick list will be added to the bottom of the list. Only pick lists (proposals) assigned to the same warehouse as the route can be added.

Route Planning 2

Example: In the example we added an extra pick list to the route. If we now check the route in the routes map, we can see that the route can be optimized by changing the route sequence.

Example

To change the sequence, select a line and move it with the ‘to the top’(2), ‘up’(3), ‘down’(4) and ‘to the bottom’(5) arrows.

Route Planning 3

To move the pick list (proposal) to the other opened route, press the ‘^’ (6) or the ‘ˇ’ (7) button. The ‘^’ (6) button will move the pick list (proposal) selected from the route in Section 2 to the route opened in Section 1. The ‘ˇ’ (7) button will move the pick list (proposal) selected from the route in Section 1 to the route opened in Section 2. The pick list will be added to the bottom of the list.

It is also possible to drag and drop the pick list (proposal) from one route to another. Simply select the pick list (proposal) in one section the drag it to the other section. The route sequence can also be modified with the drag and drop function.

Example: In the example we moved the pick list to the second line in order to optimize the route.

Example

Example

To enlarge a section, press the ‘Maximize’ button of the section.
To refresh the section, press the ‘Refresh’ button of the section.

When the route is linked to a container, an extra control panel is displayed on the screen. For more information please see: Container management - Route

22.2. Ad hoc route creation

Routes can also be created on the fly. Open the Route Planning screen via: Produmex>Route>Route planning.

Click on the ‘New route’ button to create a new route. The ‘Create new route’ window will open up.

In order to create the route, define the following:

  • Add the description of the route to the ‘Description’ field.
  • Select the loading dock from the dropdown menu.
  • Select the route date on the calendar.
  • Indicate whether the route is for proof of delivery or not. If the Routes are by default POD? (Y/N) option is enabled on the Route controller, this checkbox is automatically ticked.

Press the ‘Ok’ button to create the route.

Create a new route

The route will be added to the list of Open routes. Open the route in a section then add pick lists (proposals) as described in 22.1.3.1. Route planning

Only pick lists (proposals) assigned to the same warehouse as the loading dock of the route can be added.

22.3. Release the route

If a route is ready for shipping, release it. Go the Route planning window. Select the route from the list then click on the ‘Release route’ button. A system message will open up. Click on the ‘Yes’ button to release the route.

Release

It is possible to start picking for the route before it was released, but the route can only be shipped if it’s released. For more information about picking for a route please see: Ad hoc Picking – Route

After the route was released and the picking is finished, the route can be shipped.

23. Checks

With the checks flow it is possible to see inventory information on the device. Initiate the flow by pressing Logistics > Inventory > Checks.

Select a task
On the next screen select a task.

  1. Press the ‘Check location’ button to see the stock on a location.
  2. Press the ‘Check SSCC’ button to see the stock on a SSCC.
  3. Press the ‘Check item’ button to see the stock for an item.

23.1. Check location

To see the current stock on a given location, press the ‘Check location’ button. On the next screen scan or select a location. Every active location from the warehouse(s) assigned to the thin client on the Organizational Structure can be scanned or selected.

On the next screen the current stock on the location is listed. Please note: Logistic carriers are not included in the list.

Displayed information:

  1. Quantity on stock. If the item is a catch weight item, the Quantity/Weight on stock is displayed.
  2. Item code, Description
  3. Batch number - Second batch number - Best Before Date
  4. SSCC number

To go back to the Scan a location screen, press the left arrow button.
To go back to the Select a task screen, press the right arrow button.

23.2. Check SSCC

To see the current stock on a given logistic unit, press the ‘Check SSCC’ button. Then scan the SSCC number. On the next screen the current stock on the scanned SSCC is listed.

Displayed information:

  1. Location code where the logistic unit is stored
  2. Quantity on the logistic unit. If the item is a catch weight item, the quantity/weight on the logistic unit is displayed.
  3. Item code – description - barcode
  4. SSCC number
  5. Batch number - Second batch number
  6. Quality status
  7. Best Before Date

To go back to the Scan an SSCC screen, press the left arrow button.
To go back to the Select a task screen, press the right arrow button.

23.3. Check item

Scan the product or select it from a list after pressing the ’Select a product’ button. Every inventory item can be scanned or selected.

On the next screen select a filter.

  • Press the ‘Show all stock’ button to see the current stock of the item in every warehouse that is assigned to the thin client on the Organizational Structure.
  • Press the ‘Filter stock’ button to see the current stock for selected batch(es), best before date(s) or serial number(s) only in the warehouses that are assigned to the thin client on the Organizational Structure.
  • Press the ‘Show global information’ button to see general data about the current stock of the item in a selected warehouse.

23.3.1. Show all stock

Press the ’Show all stock’ button to display the stock available in the warehouse(s) assigned to the thin client. On the next screen every location where the item is on stock is listed.

Displayed information:

  1. Location code
  2. Quantity on stock
  3. Item code – description - barcode
  4. SSCC number
  5. Batch number - Second batch number
  6. Quality status
  7. Best Before Date

To go back to the Inventory menu, press the Stop button.
To go back to the Scan a product screen, press the right arrow button.
To go back to the Select a task screen, press the left arrow button.

23.3.2. Filter stock

Press the ‘Filter stock’ button to see the available stock for selected batch(es), best before date(s) or serial number(s).

Then scan a GS1 label. Please note: Only scan GS1 labels that contain batch number, best before date and/or serial number.

On the next screen an additional ‘Done’ button is displayed. Scan the next GS1 label or press this button to show the results.

The system displays a list of current stock of the item with the scanned batch(es), best before date(s) and/or serial number(s).

If there is no stock in the inventory with the scanned parameters, an error message is displayed.

Displayed information:

  1. Location code
  2. Quantity on stock
  3. Item code – description - barcode
  4. SSCC number
  5. Batch number - Second batch number
  6. Quality status
  7. Best Before Date

To go back to the Inventory menu, press t